TM Re7r01a

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SECTION TM B
TM
E
CONTENTS
7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR) System Diagram ......................................................38 F
System Description ..................................................38
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 8 Component Parts Location ......................................40
Component Description ...........................................42 G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 8
Diagnosis Flow .......................................................... 8 SHIFT MECHANISM ......................................... 43
Question sheet .......................................................... 9 Cross-Sectional View ..............................................43
System Diagram ......................................................45 H
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 11 System Description ..................................................45
Component Parts Location ......................................69
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................11 Component Description ...........................................71 I
System Diagram ...................................................... 11
System Description ................................................. 12 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 72
Component Parts Location ...................................... 13 System Description ..................................................72
Component Description ........................................... 15 Component Parts Location ......................................73 J
Component Description ...........................................73
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL ............................17
System Diagram ...................................................... 17 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 74 K
System Description ................................................. 17 Diagnosis Description ..............................................74
Component Parts Location ...................................... 19
Component Description ........................................... 22 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ............................ 75
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ..............75 L
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL ..............................23
System Diagram ...................................................... 23 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 81
System Description ................................................. 23 M
Component Parts Location ...................................... 26 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 81
Component Description ........................................... 28 Description ...............................................................81
DTC Logic ................................................................81
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL .............................29 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................81 N
SHIFT PATTERN ....................................................... 29 P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................. 82

SHIFT PATTERN : System Diagram ...................... 29 Description ...............................................................82 O
SHIFT PATTERN : System Description .................. 29 DTC Logic ................................................................82
SHIFT PATTERN : Component Parts Location ...... 31 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................82
SHIFT PATTERN : Component Description ........... 33
P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A ... 84 P
MANUAL MODE ........................................................ 33 Description ...............................................................84
MANUAL MODE : System Diagram ........................ 34 DTC Logic ................................................................84
MANUAL MODE : System Description ................... 34 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................84
MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location ........ 35
MANUAL MODE : Component Description ............. 37 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 85
LOCK-UP CONTROL .........................................38
Revision: 2009 March TM-1 2009 FX35/FX50

Description .............................................................. 85 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108
DTC Logic ............................................................... 85
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 86 P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 109
Description ............................................................ 109
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A .................... 87 DTC Logic ............................................................. 109
DTC Logic ............................................................... 87
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 87 P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A ............................. 110
Description ............................................................ 110
P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................... 89 DTC Logic ............................................................. 110
DTC Logic ............................................................... 89
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 90 P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B.. 112
Description ............................................................ 112
P0725 ENGINE SPEED ..................................... 91 DTC Logic ............................................................. 112
DTC Logic ............................................................... 91
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 91 P0780 SHIFT .................................................... 113
Description ............................................................ 113
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO ...................... 93 DTC Logic ............................................................. 113
DTC Logic ............................................................... 93
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 94 P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C.. 114
Description ............................................................ 114
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO ................... 95 DTC Logic ............................................................. 114
DTC Logic ............................................................... 95
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 95 P1705 TP SENSOR .......................................... 115
Description ............................................................ 115
DTC Logic ............................................................... 96
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 97 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 117
Description ............................................................ 117
DTC Logic ............................................................... 98
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 99 P1730 INTERLOCK .......................................... 119
Description ............................................................ 119
P0733 3GR INCORRECT RATIO .................... 100 DTC Logic ............................................................. 119
Description .............................................................100 Judgment of A/T Interlock ..................................... 120
DTC Logic ..............................................................100 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................101
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 121
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO .................... 102 Description ............................................................ 121
Description .............................................................102 DTC Logic ............................................................. 121
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ................................. 123
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO .................... 104 Description ............................................................ 123
Description .............................................................104 DTC Logic ............................................................. 123
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................105 Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ..... 128
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] . 128
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 106 Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-
Description .............................................................106 down)] ................................................................... 128
DTC Logic ..............................................................106
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................106 P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D.. 130
Description ............................................................ 130
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ....................... 108 DTC Logic ............................................................. 130
Description .............................................................108 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 130
DTC Logic ..............................................................108

P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E.. 131 General Precautions .............................................. 173
Description ............................................................ 131 Service Notice or Precaution ................................. 174 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 131
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 131 PREPARATION ......................................... 175
PREPARATION ............................................... 175 B
P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F.. 132
Description ............................................................ 132 Commercial Service Tool ...................................... 175
DTC Logic ............................................................. 132
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 176 C
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G.. 133 A/T FLUID ....................................................... 176
Changing ............................................................... 176
Description ............................................................ 133 TM
Adjustment ............................................................. 177
DTC Logic ............................................................. 133
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 133 A/T FLUID COOLER ....................................... 179
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR- Cleaning ................................................................ 179 E
Inspection .............................................................. 181
CUIT .................................................................. 135
Description ............................................................ 135 STALL TEST ................................................... 182
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 135 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 182 F
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ......... 137 A/T POSITION ................................................. 183
Description ............................................................ 137 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 183
Component Function Check .................................. 137 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 184
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 138 A/T SHIFT SELECTOR ................................... 184 H
Description ............................................................ 138 Exploded View ....................................................... 184
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - .... 139 Removal and Installation ....................................... 185
Component Function Check .................................. 141 Inspection .............................................................. 186
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142 I
Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid) .......... 144 CONTROL ROD .............................................. 187
Component Inspection (Shift lock relay) ............... 144 Exploded View ....................................................... 187
Component Inspection (Stop lamp switch) ............ 145 Removal and Installation ....................................... 187 J
Inspection .............................................................. 187
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR .. 146
Description ............................................................ 146 PADDLE SHIFTER .......................................... 188
Exploded View ....................................................... 188 K
Component Function Check .................................. 146
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 146 Removal and Installation ....................................... 188
Component Inspection .......................................... 149
OIL PAN .......................................................... 189 L
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 151 Exploded View ....................................................... 189
Removal and Installation ....................................... 189
TCM .................................................................. 151 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 190
M
Reference Value ................................................... 151
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - ........ 158 AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................. 192
Fail-Safe ................................................................ 162
2WD .......................................................................... 192
Protection Control ................................................. 165 N
2WD : Exploded View ............................................ 192
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 166
2WD : Removal and Installation ............................ 192
DTC Index ............................................................. 166
AWD ......................................................................... 192 O
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 168 AWD : Exploded View ........................................... 193
AWD : Removal and Installation ............................ 193
SYSTEM SYMPTOM ........................................ 168
Symptom Table ..................................................... 168 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM .............................. 194 P
PRECAUTION ............................................ 173 2WD .......................................................................... 194

2WD : Exploded View ............................................ 194
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 173 2WD : Removal and Installation ............................ 194
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System 2WD : Inspection and Adjustment ......................... 195
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 173 AWD ......................................................................... 196

AWD : Exploded View ...........................................196 SHIFT PATTERN : System Diagram .................... 223
AWD : Removal and Installation ............................196 SHIFT PATTERN : System Description ................ 223
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................198 SHIFT PATTERN : Component Parts Location .... 225
SHIFT PATTERN : Component Description ......... 226
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .... 199
MANUAL MODE ...................................................... 226
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................... 199 MANUAL MODE : System Diagram ...................... 227
MANUAL MODE : System Description ................. 227
2WD ..........................................................................199
MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location ...... 228
2WD : Exploded View ............................................199
MANUAL MODE : Component Description ........... 229
2WD : Removal and Installation ............................199
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................201 LOCK-UP CONTROL ....................................... 230
System Diagram ................................................... 230
AWD .........................................................................201
System Description ............................................... 230
AWD : Exploded View ...........................................202
Component Parts Location ................................... 232
AWD : Removal and Installation ............................202
Component Description ........................................ 233
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment .........................204
SHIFT MECHANISM ......................................... 234
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Cross-Sectional View ............................................ 234
(SDS) .......................................................... 205 System Diagram ................................................... 235
System Description ............................................... 235
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Component Parts Location ................................... 259
(SDS) ................................................................ 205 Component Description ........................................ 260
General Specification ............................................205
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ......205 SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 261
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas- System Description ............................................... 261
es ...........................................................................206 Component Parts Location ................................... 262
Stall Speed ............................................................206 Component Description ........................................ 262
Input Speed Sensor ...............................................206
Output Speed Sensor ............................................207 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .... 263
Torque Converter ..................................................207 Diagnosis Description ........................................... 263
7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM) ........................... 264
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 208 CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) ........... 264
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 208 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 270
Diagnosis Flow ......................................................208
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 270
Question sheet ......................................................209
Description ............................................................ 270
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 211 DTC Logic ............................................................. 270
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM ................................. 211
System Diagram ....................................................211 P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................. 271
System Description ................................................211 Description ............................................................ 271
Component Parts Location ....................................212 DTC Logic ............................................................. 271
Component Description .........................................213 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 271
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL .......................... 214 P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A .. 273
System Diagram ....................................................214 Description ............................................................ 273
System Description ................................................214 DTC Logic ............................................................. 273
Component Parts Location ....................................216 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 273
Component Description .........................................217 P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERA-
SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL ............................ 218 TURE SENSOR A ............................................. 274
System Diagram ....................................................218 Description ............................................................ 274
System Description ................................................218 DTC Logic ............................................................. 274
Component Parts Location ....................................221 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 275
Component Description .........................................222
P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A ................... 276
SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL .......................... 223 Description ............................................................ 276
DTC Logic ............................................................. 276
SHIFT PATTERN .....................................................223 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276

P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR .................. 278 DTC Logic .............................................................. 299
Description ............................................................ 278 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 299 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 278
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 279 P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B. 300
Description ............................................................. 300
B
P0725 ENGINE SPEED .................................... 280 DTC Logic .............................................................. 300
Description ............................................................ 280 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 300
DTC Logic ............................................................. 280
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 280 P0780 SHIFT ................................................... 301 C
Description ............................................................. 301
P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 282 DTC Logic .............................................................. 301
TM
DTC Logic ............................................................. 282
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 283 P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C. 302
Description ............................................................. 302
P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO .................. 284 DTC Logic .............................................................. 302 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 284
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 284 P1705 TP SENSOR ......................................... 303
Description ............................................................. 303 F
DTC Logic ............................................................. 285 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 286 P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL .................. 305
Description ............................................................. 305
H
DTC Logic ............................................................. 287
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 288 P1730 INTERLOCK ........................................ 307
Description ............................................................. 307 I
Description ............................................................ 289 Judgment of A/T Interlock ...................................... 308
DTC Logic ............................................................. 289 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 308 J
P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO ................... 309
P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 291 Description ............................................................. 309
Description ............................................................ 291 DTC Logic .............................................................. 309 K
DTC Logic ............................................................. 291 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 310
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH ............................... 311 L
P0735 5GR INCORRECT RATIO ..................... 293 Description ............................................................. 311
Description ............................................................ 293 DTC Logic .............................................................. 311
DTC Logic ............................................................. 293 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 311
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 294 Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) ...... 316 M
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)].. 316
P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 295 Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-
Description ............................................................ 295 down)] .................................................................... 316 N
DTC Logic ............................................................. 295
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 295 P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D. 317
Description ............................................................. 317
P0744 TORQUE CONVERTER ........................ 297 DTC Logic .............................................................. 317 O
DTC Logic ............................................................. 297
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 297 P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E . 318 P
Description ............................................................. 318
P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A.. 298 DTC Logic .............................................................. 318
DTC Logic ............................................................. 298
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 298 P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F . 319
Description ............................................................. 319
P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A ............................. 299 DTC Logic .............................................................. 319
Description ............................................................ 299

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................319 A/T FLUID ......................................................... 363
Changing ............................................................... 363
P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G. 320 Adjustment ............................................................ 364
Description .............................................................320
DTC Logic ..............................................................320 A/T FLUID COOLER ........................................ 366
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................320 Cleaning ................................................................ 366
Inspection .............................................................. 368
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIR-
CUIT ................................................................. 322 STALL TEST .................................................... 369
Description .............................................................322 Inspection and Judgment ...................................... 369
A/T POSITION .................................................. 370
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT ........ 324 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 370
Description .............................................................324
Component Function Check ..................................324 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 371
A/T SHIFT SELECTOR .................................... 371
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM .................................... 325 Exploded View ...................................................... 371
Description .............................................................325 Removal and Installation ....................................... 372
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - .....326 Inspection .............................................................. 373
Component Function Check ..................................328
CONTROL ROD ............................................... 374
Exploded View ...................................................... 374
Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid) ..........331
Component Inspection (Shift lock relay) ................331
Inspection .............................................................. 374
Component Inspection (Stop lamp switch) ............332
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR . 333 PADDLE SHIFTER ........................................... 375

Exploded View ...................................................... 375
Description .............................................................333
Component Function Check ..................................333
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................333 OIL PAN ............................................................ 376
Component Inspection ...........................................336 Exploded View ...................................................... 376
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............. 338
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 377
TCM .................................................................. 338
AIR BREATHER HOSE .................................... 379
Reference Value ....................................................338
Exploded View ...................................................... 379
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - .........345
Fail-Safe ................................................................349
Protection Control ..................................................352 FLUID COOLER SYSTEM ............................... 381
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................353 Exploded View ...................................................... 381
DTC Index .............................................................353 Removal and Installation ....................................... 381
Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 383
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 355
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ... 384
SYSTEM SYMPTOM ....................................... 355
Symptom Table .....................................................355 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY .......................... 384
Exploded View ...................................................... 384
PRECAUTION ............................................ 360 Removal and Installation ....................................... 384
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 360 Inspection and Adjustment .................................... 386
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ................................................................360 (SDS) ......................................................... 387
General Precautions ..............................................360 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Service Notice or Precaution .................................361
(SDS) ................................................................ 387
PREPARATION .......................................... 362 General Specification ............................................ 387
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs ..... 387
PREPARATION ............................................... 362 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releas-
Commercial Service Tool ......................................362 es .......................................................................... 388
Stall Speed ............................................................ 388
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 363 Input Speed Sensor .............................................. 388

Output Speed Sensor ............................................ 388 Torque Converter .................................................. 388
A
TM

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
BASIC INSPECTION
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000003902792
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

1. Refer to TM-9, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (condi-
tions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings in
the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data using CONSULT-III and affix to the Work Order
Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-168, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
3.REPRODUCE MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
Also investigate whether the symptom is a fail-safe or normal operation. Refer to TM-162, "Fail-Safe".
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-9, "Question sheet".
Verify the relationship between the symptom and the conditions in which the malfunction described by the cus-
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-9, "Question sheet".
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-166, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".

6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” A

Use TM-168, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
B
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
C
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
TM
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed. E
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4.
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced? F
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased. G
Question sheet INFOID:0000000003902793
DESCRIPTION H
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop-
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved. I
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-
fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
J
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.
K
SEF907L
WORKSHEET SAMPLE L
Question Sheet
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date M
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date
Trans. Mileage km/Mile N

Question Sheet
Symptoms Vehicle does not move ( Any position Particular position )
No up-shift ( 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th 4th → 5th 5th → 6th 6th →
7th)
No down-shift ( 7th → 6th 6th → 5th 5th → 4th 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd
→ 1st)
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point too high or too low
Shift shock or slip
Noise or vibration
No kick down
No pattern select
Others
Frequency All the time Under certain conditions Sometimes ( times a day)
Weather conditions Not affected
Weather Fine Clouding Raining Snowing Other ( )
Temp. [Approx. °C (
Temp. Hot Warm Cool Cold
°F)]
Humidity High Middle Low
Transmission conditions Not affected
Cold During warm-up After warm-up
Engine speed ( rpm)
Road conditions Not affected
In town In suburbs Freeway Off road (Up / Down)
Driving conditions Not affected
While cruis-
At starting While idling While engine racing At racing
ing
While accelerating While decelerating While turning (Right / Left)
Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000003838834
B
Without Paddle Shifter

C
TM
JSDIA1357GB J
With Paddle Shifter
K
JSDIA1358GB

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000003838835
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Switch, Sensor or Signal TCM function Actuator

• Transmission range switch • Line pressure control (TM-17) • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Accelerator pedal position sig- • Shift change control (TM-23) • Direct clutch solenoid valve
nal • Shift pattern control • Front brake solenoid valve
• Closed throttle position signal - Shift pattern (TM-29) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid
• Wide open throttle position sig- - Manual mode (TM-34) valve
nal • Lock-up control (TM-38) • Low brake solenoid valve
• Engine speed signal ⇒ • Fail-safe control (TM-162) ⇒ • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• A/T fluid temperature sensor • Self-diagnosis (TM-75) • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Output speed sensor • CONSULT-III communication line (TM- • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Vehicle speed signal 75) • 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Manual mode switch signal • CAN communication line (TM-81) • A/T CHECK indicator lamp
• Stop lamp switch signal • Back-up lamp relay
• Side G sensor signal • Starter relay
• Input speed sensor 1, 2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000003838836
A
TM
M
JSDIA0782ZZ
1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector
4. Control valve with TCM* 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator N
7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp
A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal
D. Combination meter O
NOTE:
• The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly.
P
- Manual mode select switch
- Manual mode position select switch
- Shift position switch
• The following components are included in control valve with TCM.
- TCM
- Input speed sensor 1, 2
- Output speed sensor

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
- A/T fluid temperature sensor
- Transmission range switch
- Direct clutch solenoid valve
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
- Input clutch solenoid valve
- Front brake solenoid valve
- Low brake solenoid valve
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve
- 2346 brake solenoid valve
- Line pressure solenoid valve
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
*: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly.
With Paddle Shifter
JSDIA0787ZZ
4. Control valve with TCM* 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor 6. Manual mode indicator
7. Shift position indicator 8. A/T CHECK indicator lamp 9. Paddle shifter (shift-down)
10. Paddle shifter (shift-up)

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
D. Combination meter E. Steering wheel A
NOTE:
B
C
- TCM
TM
E
- Front brake solenoid valve F
- 2346 brake solenoid valve G
*: Control valve with TCM is included in A/T assembly. H
Component Description INFOID:0000000003838837
I
Name Function
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and
TCM
for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T.
J
Transmission range switch TM-84, "Description"

Output speed sensor TM-89, "Description"
K
Input speed sensor 1
TM-87, "Description"
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-85, "Description" L
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-112, "Description"
Front brake solenoid valve TM-114, "Description"
M
Direct clutch solenoid valve TM-133, "Description"
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-130, "Description"
Low brake solenoid valve TM-131, "Description" N
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-110, "Description"
2346 brake solenoid valve TM-132, "Description"
O
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-109, "Description"
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-106, "Description"
Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-115, "Description" P
Manual mode switch TM-123, "Description"
Paddle shifter TM-123, "Description"
Starter relay TM-82, "Description"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
Stop lamp switch TM-138, "Description"

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
Name Function
ECM EC-30, "System Description"
BCM BCS-6, "System Description"
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-29, "System Description"
Wheel sensor BRC-53, "Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-79, "Description"

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
A
TM
JSDIA1345GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H
Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator

Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed I
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Line pressure solenoid valve J
Engine speed signal* Line pressure control ↓
Pressure regulator valve
Accelerator pedal position signal*
ECM
Engine and A/T integrated control signal K
(Engine torque)*
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
L
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres- M
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the N
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
O
Normal Control

Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force.
PCIA0008E
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
PCIA0009E
During Shift Change

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic cor-
responds to engine speed, during engine brake operation.
PCIA0010E
At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line A
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
PCIA0011E
TM

E
JSDIA0782ZZ

D. Combination meter
NOTE:
- TCM

With Paddle Shifter
A
TM
L
JSDIA0787ZZ
1. Selector lever position indicator 2. A/T shift selector assembly 3. A/T assembly connector M
10. Paddle shifter (shift-up) N
D. Combination meter E. Steering wheel
O
NOTE:
P
- TCM

Name Function
TCM
A/T fluid temperature sensor TM-85, "Description"
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
the driving state.

SHIFT CHANGE CONTROL
A
TM
JSDIA1346GB
I
J

K
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed • High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
• Direct clutch solenoid
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature valve L
• Input clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal*
• Low brake solenoid valve
Accelerator pedal position signal* • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Shift change control
• Front brake solenoid valve
M
ECM Closed throttle position signal*
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal lenoid valve
(Engine torque)* • Line pressure solenoid N
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal* • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
*: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line. O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
P
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes

possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained.
PCIA0012E
Shift Change
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc.
Shift Change System Diagram
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Blipping Control
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression.
- When downshifting by the manual mode.
JSDIA0826GB

• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression. A
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression B
TM
G
JSDIA0815GB
Downshifting by the manual mode

H
JSDIA0817GB M

JSDIA0782ZZ
NOTE:
- TCM

- Transmission range switch A
- Input clutch solenoid valve B
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve C
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM
With Paddle Shifter

E
P
JSDIA0787ZZ

NOTE:
- TCM
Name Function
TCM
Low brake solenoid valve TM-131, "Description"

SHIFT PATTERN CONTROL
A
SHIFT PATTERN
SHIFT PATTERN : System Diagram INFOID:0000000003941715
B
TM
I
JSDIA1364GB
SHIFT PATTERN : System Description INFOID:0000000003941716 J

K
Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed
• High and low reverse
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed clutch solenoid valve L
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature
valve
Engine speed signal* • Input clutch solenoid valve
M
• 2346 brake solenoid valve
ECM Shift pattern control
Closed throttle position signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so- N
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
lenoid valve
(engine torque)*
• Line pressure solenoid
ABS actuator and electric unit valve
Side G sensor signal*
(control unit) • Anti-interlock solenoid O
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
P
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ASC (Adaptive Shift Control)
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
For example.....
• When driving on an up/down slope

ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
JSDIA1362GB
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switch-
ing to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main gate enables to cancel DS mode.
- After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the
selector lever is shifted to the manual gate. (With paddle shifter)

SHIFT PATTERN : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004109692
A
TM
M
JSDIA0782ZZ
NOTE:
P
- TCM

With Paddle Shifter
JSDIA0787ZZ

NOTE:
B
C
- TCM
TM
E
SHIFT PATTERN : Component Description INFOID:0000000003941718
I
Name Function
TCM
J

TM-87, "Description" K
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-112, "Description" L
M
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-110, "Description" N
O
BCM BCS-6, "System Description" P
MANUAL MODE

MANUAL MODE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005150142
JSDIA1361GB
MANUAL MODE : System Description INFOID:0000000005150143

• High and low reverse clutch
Engine speed signal*1 solenoid valve
ECM
Accelerator pedal position signal*1 • Direct clutch solenoid valve
Manual mode signal*1 • Low brake solenoid valve
Shift pattern control • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Not manual mode signal*1 • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch sole-
Manual mode shift up signal*1
Combination meter noid valve
Manual mode shift down signal*1 • Line pressure solenoid valve
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve
Paddle shifter shift up signal*1, *2
Paddle shifter shift down signal*1, *2

*1: This signal is transmitted via CAN communication line.
*2: With paddle shifter
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Manual Mode
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, not manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual
mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from combination
meter via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based on these
signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of the
driver.

• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
TM-162, "Fail-Safe". A
MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005150146
Without Paddle Shifter B
TM
JSDIA0782ZZ
N
O
P
NOTE:
- TCM

With Paddle Shifter
JSDIA0787ZZ

10. Paddle shifter (shift-up) A
B
NOTE:
C
TM
- TCM
E
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve F
- Low brake solenoid valve G
- Line pressure solenoid valve H
I
MANUAL MODE : Component Description INFOID:0000000005150145
J
Name Function
TCM
K
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-112, "Description" L
M
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-110, "Description" N
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-106, "Description" O
Combination meter MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
P

LOCK-UP CONTROL
LOCK-UP CONTROL
JSDIA1350GB

A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Torque converter clutch sole-
noid valve
Lock-up control ↓
Accelerator pedal position signal* Torque converter clutch con-
ECM trol valve
Closed throttle position signal*
(Engine torque)*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up operation condition table
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Control

Lock-up control system diagram

LOCK-UP CONTROL
JSDIA0847GB
TM
Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. E
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. F
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con- G
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
H
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into I
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control J
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR. K

LOCK-UP CONTROL
JSDIA0782ZZ
NOTE:
- TCM

LOCK-UP CONTROL
- Transmission range switch A
- Input clutch solenoid valve B
- Anti-interlock solenoid valve C
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM
With Paddle Shifter

E
P
JSDIA0787ZZ

LOCK-UP CONTROL
NOTE:
- TCM
Name Function
TCM
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation
Torque converter clutch control valve
transiently, lock-up smoothly.

SHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT MECHANISM
A
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000003838838
2WD MODELS B
TM
JSDIA0768ZZ
J
1. Low brake 2. Reverse brake 3. Direct clutch
4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.*1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 2 Front sun gear K
9.*
10.*3 Front carrier 11. Under drive carrier 12. 1st one-way clutch
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft L
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.* 2 Under drive sun gear
19.*3 Under drive internal gear 20.*4 Front internal gear 21. Mid sun gear
Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear M
22.*1
25. High and low reverse clutch hub 26. Control valve with TCM 27. Parking gear
28. Rear extension 29. Output shaft
N
*1: 6 and 22 are one unit.
O
AWD MODELS
P

SHIFT MECHANISM
JSDIA0771ZZ

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.* 1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.*2 Front sun gear
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.*4 Input shaft
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear
22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear
28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
P
JSDIA0877GB
DESCRIPTION

SHIFT MECHANISM
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-
sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
JSDIA1363GB
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0880GB
Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. P
“P” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
JSDIA1277GB
• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.
“D1” and “DS1” Positions

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0866GB
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
• The 2nd one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear sun gear.
• The mid sun gear is fixed by the low brake.
• Each planetary gear enters the state described below.

SHIFT MECHANISM
Front planetary gear
Name Front sun gear Front carrier Front internal gear
Condition — Output Input
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from front internal Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions
gear gear input shaft
Under drive planetary gear

Name Under drive sun gear Under drive carrier Under drive internal gear
Condition — Fixed Input/Output
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution — Clockwise revolution
Acceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions —
ternal gear front carrier
Rear planetary gear

Name Rear sun gear Rear carrier Rear internal gear
Condition Fixed Output Input
Direction of rotation — Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Deceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
gear under drive internal gear
Mid planetary gear

Name Mid sun gear Mid carrier Mid internal gear
Deceleration from mid internal Same number of revolution as the
gear rear carrier
“M1” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0867GB
• The 1st one-way clutch and the front brake regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverses clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates only while coasting.

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

gear rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0868GB
• The front sun gear and the under drive sun gear are fixed by the 2346 brake. P

SHIFT MECHANISM
Deceleration from front internal Same number of revolution as the
gear input shaft

Condition Fixed — Input/Output
Deceleration from under drive in- Same number of revolution as the
Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

gear rear carrier
“M2” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0869GB
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions — Deceleration from mid internal gear
rear carrier
“D3”, “DS3” and “M3” Positions

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0870GB
• The direct clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the rear carrier.

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Direction of rotation Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution Clockwise revolution
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
rear internal gear rear internal gear under drive internal gear
Mid planetary gear

rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0871GB
• The high and low reverse clutch gets engaged and connects the rear sun gear with the mid sun gear.

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

mid internal gear mid internal gear rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0872GB
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. P

SHIFT MECHANISM
Rear planetary gear
Condition — input/Output —
rear carrier input shaft rear carrier
Mid planetary gear

mid internal gear mid internal gear input shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0873GB
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier.

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft
Rear planetary gear

Condition — Input/Output Input
Same number of revolution as the Same number of revolution as the
Number of revolutions Acceleration from rear carrier
input shaft front carrier
Mid planetary gear

Number of revolutions Acceleration from mid internal gear Acceleration from mid internal gear
input shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0874GB
• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. P

• Each planetary gear enters state described below.

SHIFT MECHANISM

Acceleration from under drive inter- Same number of revolution as the
nal gear front carrier
Rear planetary gear

input shaft under drive internal gear
Mid planetary gear

input shaft
“R” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0875GB
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

Condition Output Fixed Input
Acceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Mid planetary gear

Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Number of revolutions Deceleration from mid sun gear —
rear sun gear

SHIFT MECHANISM
A
TM
M
JSDIA0782ZZ
NOTE:
P
- TCM

SHIFT MECHANISM
With Paddle Shifter
JSDIA0787ZZ

SHIFT MECHANISM
NOTE:
B
C
- TCM
TM
E
I
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function
Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
J
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear. K
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
L
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
rotation.
M
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
tation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
N
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
Oil pump
each lubricating system.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position unless the brake pedal is depressed while the igni-
tion switch is ON.
The shift lock is unlocked by the shift lock unit that is activated when the ignition switch is ON and the stop
lamp switch is turned ON (brake pedal is depressed).
Therefore, the shift lock unit receives no ON signal and the shift lock remains locked if the above conditions
are not fulfilled. (However, a shift operation is allowed if the shift lock release button is pressed.)
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if
the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and
presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located
below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock
plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from
the “P” position for this reason.
However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing
the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
JSDIA0119ZZ
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed)

The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and
the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when
the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON.
The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selec-
tor button (F) is pressed.
The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for
this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P
position.
JSDIA0120ZZ
OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION

The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P”
because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accord-
ingly, the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of
the brake operation.
The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock
plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the
shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released.
JSDIA0121ZZ
“P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)

When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock
unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained.
When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the
“P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift
lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and
selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM
JSDIA0915ZZ
I
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid
4. Slider A 5. A/T shift selector connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay 9. Stop lamp switch J
10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper
D. Center console K
*: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
Component Description INFOID:0000000003838845 L
Component Function
M
Shift lock solenoid TM-138, "Description"
The lock plate restricts the position pin stroke by se-
Lock plate lector button operation according to the shift lock unit N
Shift lock unit
A/T shift selector status.
assembly Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the
Shift lock release button
shift lock forcibly.
O
The position pin, linking with the selector button, re-
Position pin
stricts the selector lever movement.
Shift lock relay
TM-138, "Description" P
Stop lamp switch

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000003838846
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to EC-
542, "DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part.
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the
instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-111, "Diagnosis Description".

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (TCM)
A
CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000003838848
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS B
Diagnostic test mode Function

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately. C
Self-Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
TM
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support
It monitors the starts of CAN communication.
Monitor
E
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS F
Display Items List

Refer to TM-166, "DTC Index". G
DATA MONITOR
Display Items List
H
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
Monitor Item Selection
SELEC- I
Monitored item (Unit) ECU IN- Remarks
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
J
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X — K
CAN communication.
Displays the output shaft revolution calculated
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
from the pulse signal of revolution sensor.
Displays the input shaft revolution calculated
L
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X from front sun gear revolution and front carrier
revolution.
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated M
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 1.
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculat-
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
ed from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 2. N
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
communication.
Displays the revolution difference between input O
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
speed and engine speed.
Displays the accelerator position estimated value
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
received via CAN communication.
P
Displays the throttle position received via CAN
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
communication.
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculat-
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X ed from the signal voltage of A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor.

SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value of
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X torque converter outlet calculated from the signal
voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid tempera-
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
ture sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM.
Displays the command current from TCM to the

LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
line pressure solenoid.
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
torque converter clutch solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
low brake solenoid.
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
front brake solenoid.
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
input clutch solenoid.
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
direct clutch solenoid.
2346/B SOL (A) — X
2346 brake solenoid.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the
L/P SOL MON (A) — — line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
TCC SOL MON (A) — — torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value.
L/B SOL MON (A) — — low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor val-
ue.
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and dis-
plays the monitor value.
I/C SOL MON (A) — — input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
D/C SOL MON (A) — — direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
2346/B SOL MON (A) — — 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Displays the gear ratio calculated from input rev-
GEAR RATIO — X
olution and output revolution.
Displays the engine torque estimated value re-
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —
ceived via CAN communication.

A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — flected the requested torque of each control unit
C
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres-
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — —
sure calculation process of shift change control.
Displays the input torque using for the oil pres- TM
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — —
sure calculation process of line pressure control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of torque
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
oil pressure calculation process of lock-up con- E
trol.
converter clutch solenoid valve calculated by the F
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
oil pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of low G
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
H
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of high and
low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated by I
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
the oil pressure calculation process of shift
change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of input J
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
K
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres- L
Displays the gear change data using the shift pat-
SHIFT PATTERN — —
tern control. M
Displays the vehicle speed for control using the
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
control of TCM.
RANGE SW 4 (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the operation status of transmission N
range switch 4.
Displays the operation status of transmission
range switch 3. O
range switch 2.
Displays the operation status of transmission P
range switch 1.
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (up
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).

SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the operation status of selector lever (up
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
switch).
Displays whether the selector lever is in any po-
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
sition other than manual shift gate position.
Displays whether the selector lever is in the man-
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
ual shift gate position.
DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.
• Displays the reception status of 1 position

switch signal received via CAN communica-
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Not mounted but displayed.
• Displays the reception status of overdrive con-
trol switch signal received via CAN communi-
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
cation.
Displays the reception status of stop lamp switch
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X —
signal received via CAN communication.
• Displays the reception status of POWER mode
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X — signal received via CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X —
request signal received via CAN communication.
Displays the reception status of ASCD operation
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ABS operation
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X —
request signal received via CAN communication.
Displays whether the reception value of A/T shift
TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON/OFF) X — schedule change demand signal received via
CAN communication is “cold”.
CAN communication is “warm”.
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of low brake.
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
related parts of high and low reversed clutch, in-
put clutch or front brake.
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of input clutch or front brake.
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of high and low reversed clutch.
Displays the kickdown condition signal status re-
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the idling status signal status received
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
via CAN communication.

A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
“coasting” judged by TCM.
Displays the transmission value of shift position C
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — —
signal transmitted via CAN communication.
Displays the command status from TCM to start-
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
er relay. TM
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN com-
munication.
E
• Displays the transmission status of ATF tem-
perature signal transmitted via CAN communi-
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
cation.
• Not mounted but displayed. F
Displays the transmission status of manual mode
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the G
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor
status.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the H
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
Displays the command status from TCM to anti-
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
interlock solenoid.
I
SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.
Displays the current transmission gear position

GEAR — X
recognized by TCM. J
Displays the target gear position of gear change
NEXT GR POSI — — that is calculated based on the vehicle speed in-
formation and throttle information. K
Displays the transmission driving mode recog-
SHIFT MODE — —
nized by TCM.
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the L
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of direct clutch.
M
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of front brake.
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the N
related parts of 2346 brake.
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the O
related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION

P
DTC Work Support

Item Description Check item
Following items for “1GR function ratio” can be confirmed.
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid
valve
• Front brake solenoid
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG)
Following items for “3GR function ratio” can be confirmed. valve
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • High and low reverse
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• 2346 brake solenoid
valve
Following items for “5GR function ratio” can be confirmed. • Anti-interlock sole-
5TH GR FNCTN P0735 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) noid valve
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1,
2
• Each clutch and brake
• Hydraulic control cir-
Following items for “7GR function ratio” can be confirmed. cuit
• Harness or connec-
tors
• Torque converter
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. clutch solenoid valve
TCC SOL FNCTN CHECK • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Torque converter
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input speed sensor 1,
2
cuit

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
Description INFOID:0000000003838849
B
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links C
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. TM
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003838850
DTC DETECTION LOGIC E
Diagnostic item is detected

DTC Trouble diagnosis name Possible cause
when... F
• Harness or connectors
TCM is not transmitting or re-
(CAN communication line is
U1000 CAN Communication Line ceiving CAN communication
open or shorted.) G
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• TCM
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION J
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine.
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. K
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” L
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to TM-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000003838851
Go to LAN-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". N

P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
Set DTC if the starter monitor • Harness or connectors
value is OFF when the ignition (Starter relay and TCM circuit
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit
switch is ON at the“ P” and “N” is open or shorted.)
positions. • Starter relay circuit

1.PRECONDITIONING
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
Is “P0615” detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
IPDM E/R connector

Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground Selector lever in “P” and

Battery voltage
“N” positions.
E5 30
Selector lever in other
0V
positions.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-10, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehi-
cle side harness connector terminal.

P0615 STARTER RELAY
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector A
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts.
C
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
TM
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
F51 9 Not existed E
YES >> GO TO 4.
F
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". G
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-199, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD) or TM-202, "AWD :
Exploded View" (AWD). H

P0705 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH A
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and transmits a signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
(Transmission range switch-
Transmission range switch sig-
Transmission Rnage Sensor A es 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
P0705 nals input with impossible pat-
Circuit (PRNDL Input) is open or shorted.)
tern.
• Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3 and 4

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each
position for 2 seconds or more)
4. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more.
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8

VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”.

Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
Exploded View" (AWD).

P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
A
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM. B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C
DTC Trouble diagnosis name Diagnostic item is detected when... Possible cause
• Harness or connectors TM
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40
(Sensor circuit is open.)
°C (−40 °F) or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehi-
• A/T fluid temperature
cle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
sensor
E
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 (Sensor circuit is short.)
°C (356 °F) or more for 5 seconds. • A/T fluid temperature
sensor F
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is in the
following conditions while driving the vehicle at the vehi-
cle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. G
Transmission Fluid Tempera-
P0710 : 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F)
ture Sensor A Circuit
: 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F)
For 4 minutes H
: 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F) • Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
: 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F) • A/T fluid temperature
: −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F) sensor
I
: −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F)
For 7 minutes
: −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F)
: −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F)
J
For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
1.PRECONDITIONING L
M
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION N
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”. O
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.
SLCT LVR POSI :D

P
With GST



P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
A
The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/ B
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Diagnostic item is detected TM

when...
Set DTC when the revolution of
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A (Sensor circuit is open.) E
P0717 input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 is
Circuit No Signal • Input speed sensor 1 and/or
270 rpm or less.
2
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING G
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION I
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” with “Data J
Monitor”.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position. K
NOTE:
Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this
test. L
SLCT LVR POSI :D

GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th M
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CLSD THL POS : OFF
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm N
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. O
NO >> INSPECTION END P



P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
The Output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal B
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
• Set DTC when the output
speed sensor recognizes that E
the vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3
MPH) or less even if the vehi-
cle speed signal recognizes
that the vehicle speed is 20 F
km/h (12 MPH) or more.
(Only when starts after the ig-
nition switch is turned ON.)
• Set DTC if the vehicle speed G
recognized by the output
speed sensor decelerates 36
km/h (23 MPH) or more dur-
ing 60 msec when the output H
speed sensor recognizes that • Harness or connectors
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit the vehicle speed is 36 km/h (Sensor circuit is open.)
(23 MPH) or more and the ve- • Output speed sensor
I
hicle speed signal recognizes
that the vehicle speed is 24
• Set DTC if the vehicle speed J
of output speed sensor decel-
erates 36 km/h (23 MPH) or
more even if the vehicle
speed of vehicle speed signal K
accelerates or decelerates 24
km/h (15 MPH) or less during
60 msec when the output
speed sensor recognizes that L
the vehicle speed is 36 km/h
(23 MPH) or more.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M

CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. N
1.PRECONDITIONING
O
>> GO TO 2. P
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more

With GST


P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
A
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM with CAN communication line. B

when... TM
• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM. Harness or connectors
E
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • Set DTC when the engine (ECM to TCM circuit is open or
speed is more less 150 rpm shorted.)
even if the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (7 MPH). F
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. G
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and H
>> GO TO 2. I
With CONSULT-III J
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”.
K
SLCT LVR POSI :D
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH)
4. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. L
With GST
Is “P0725” detected? M
N
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM O

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”. P
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-124, "CONSULT-III Function".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”.

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
Is any DTC other than “P0725” detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-75, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".

P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 6GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not B
only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control
valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000003838871 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Input clutch solenoid valve E
• Direct clutch solenoid valve
solenoid valve
Set DTC when the gear ratio is;
• Front brake solenoid valve F
P0729 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio • 0.914 or more
• 0.813 or less
• Each clutch and brake G
• Output speed sensor
• Hydraulic control circuit
H
CAUTION:
• “TM-94, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE- I
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause
secondary malfunction.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and K
>> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK ATF TEMPERATURE
With CONSULT-III M
2. Select “ATF TEMP 1” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Check ATF temperature is in the following range.
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
2. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Is ATF temperature within specified range?
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Drive vehicle to warm ATF or stop engine to cool ATF.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM (PART 1)
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “6TH GR FNCTN P0729” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.
2. Drive vehicle with manual mode and maintain the following conditions.

GEAR : 6th
ACCELE POSI : 0.7/8 or more
VEHICLE SPEED : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF
CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not detected on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results”
in “TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0729” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-
166, "DTC Index".
With GST
Selector lever : “M” position

Gear position : 6th
Accelerator pedal opening : 0.7/8 or more
Vehicle speed : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more
2. Check DTC.
Is “OUT OF CONDITION”, “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED RESULT NG” displayed? / Is “P0729”
detected?
YES-1 >> “OUT OF CONDITION”: Perform “Step 3” again.
YES-2 >> “STOP VEHICLE”: GO TO 4.
YES-3 >> “COMPLETED RESULT NG”: Go to TM-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES-4 >> “P0729” is detected: Go to TM-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR and check shift timing and shift shock.
>> INSPECTION END



P0730 INCORRECT GEAR RATIO
A
• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear. B

• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
Set DTC when the revolution of • 2346 brake solenoid valve
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio under drive sun gear is 8,000 • Front brake solenoid valve E
rpm or more. • Input speed sensor 1, 2

CAUTION: F
• “TM-95, "Diagnosis Procedure"” must be performed before starting “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
• Never perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” before completing the repair, which may cause G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
I
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
K
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
L
ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
M
With GST
N
NO >> INSPECTION END O
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P


This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 1GR position as instructed by TCM. This is not
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 4.645 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 1st A
3. Keep the current driving status for 2 seconds or more if CONSULT-III screen changes from “OUT OF B
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not detected on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” C
166, "DTC Index".
With GST
1. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 2 seconds or more. TM

Gear position : 1st E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
YES-4 >> “P0731” is detected: Go to TM-97, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 3.013 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 2nd A
CAUTION:
166, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 2nd E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 1.927 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 3rd A
CAUTION:
166, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 3rd E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 1.332 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 4th A
CAUTION:
166, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 4th E
2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 0.943 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 5th A
CAUTION:
166, "DTC Index".
With GST

2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L

P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4,
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the vehicle speed sensor and accelera-
tor pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be con-
trolled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the torque con-
verter clutch solenoid valve
(Solenoid valve circuit is
Torque Converter Clutch Cir- monitor value is 0.4 A or less
P0740 open or shorted.)
cuit/Open when the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve command
noid valve
value is more than 0.75 A.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” with “Data Monitor”.
NOTE:
test.
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
With GST


YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-199, "2WD : Exploded View" (2WD) or TM-202, "AWD : A
B
TM

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve
sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
Set DTC when the lock-up is
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit noid valve
P0744 not performed in spite of within
Intermittent • Torque converter
the lock-up area.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
test.
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
With GST


P0745 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID A
A
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in B
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the line pressure
solenoid valve monitor value is E
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A 0.4 A or less when the line pres-
open or shorted.)
sure solenoid valve command
• Line pressure solenoid valve
F
1.PRECONDITIONING
G
H
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III I
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
3. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. J
With GST
Is “P0745” detected? K
L

M
N

P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake.
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
• A DTC is set if the anti-inter-
lock solenoid valve monitor
value is ON when the anti-in-
terlock solenoid valve com- • Harness or connectors
mand value is OFF. (Solenoid valve circuit is
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• A DTC is set if the anti-inter- open or shorted.)
lock solenoid valve monitor • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
value is OFF when the anti-
interlock solenoid valve com-
mand value is ON.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”.
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST


A
TM

P0775 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID B
• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
mission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted
to the optimum position.
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the input clutch
solenoid valve monitor value is
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B 0.4 A or less when the input
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST


P0780 SHIFT
P0780 SHIFT
A
The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Shifting from 3rg to 4th with E
the selector level in “D” posi-
tion, the gear ratio does not
shift to 1.412 (gear ratio of
P0780 Shift Error • Low brake solenoid valve
4th).
F
• Shifting from 5th to 6th or 6th
to 7th, the engine speed ex-
ceeds the prescribed speed.
G
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. H
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
J
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. K
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
L
SLCT LVR POSI :D
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
M
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. N


P0795 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID C
• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
sion range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will then be shifted to
the optimum position.
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the front brake
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C 0.4 A or less when the front
open or shorted.)
brake solenoid valve command

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
With GST


P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. B
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM.
• The TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via CAN communication. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC Trouble diagnosis name Possible cause E
when...
TCM detects the difference be-
Harness or connectors
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- tween two accelerator pedal po-
P1705 (Sensor circuit is open or short- F
sor Signal sition signals received from
ed.)
ECM via CAN communication.

G
1.PRECONDITIONING
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. J
SLCT LVR POSI :D

K
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM N
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”. O
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-542, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM

With CONSULT-III
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-166, "DTC Index".

P1705 TP SENSOR
NO >> GO TO 3.

P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM by CAN communication line. B
The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will
then use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Set DTC when the vehicle E
speed signal recognizes that
MPH) or less even if the out-
put speed sensor recognizes F
nition switch is turned ON.) G
• Set DTC if the vehicle speed
recognized by the vehicle
speed signal decelerates 36
H
ing 60 msec when the vehicle
speed signal recognizes that Harness or connectors
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal the vehicle speed is 36 km/h (Sensor circuit is open or short-
I
(23 MPH) or more and the ed.)
output speed sensor recog-
nizes that the vehicle speed
is 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more. J
of vehicle speed signal decel-
more even if the vehicle K
speed of output speed sensor
60 msec when the vehicle L
speed sensor recognizes that
(23 MPH) or more.
M
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. N
• Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
1.PRECONDITIONING
O
P
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side.
3. Start up in M1, and then upshift to M2.
4. Accelerate to approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) in M2.

1.CHECK DTC OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT).

With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ABS”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to BRC-121, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-112, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 4.

P1730 INTERLOCK
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. B


when... TM
(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
E
Set DTC when the output
speed sensor detects the de-
P1730 Interlock solenoid valve F
celeration of 12 km/h (7 MPH)
or more for 1 second.
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve G
NOTE: H
When the vehicle is driven fixed in second gear, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but
this is not a input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
CAUTION:
DURE”. J
K
1.PRECONDITIONING
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION M
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” with “Data Monitor”. N
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.
SLCT LVR POSI :D O

GEAR : 1st through 7th
With GST P

P1730 INTERLOCK
Judgment of A/T Interlock INFOID:0000000003838902
Refer to TM-162, "Fail-Safe".



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 0.728 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 7th
CAUTION:
166, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 7th
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
A
• The manual mode switch, manual mode shift-up switch and manual mode shift-down switch are installed in B
the A/T shift selector assembly. It transmits manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to
unified meter and A/C amp. Then unified meter and A/C amp. transmits signals to TCM via CAN communi-
cation.
• Manual mode switch transmits manual mode switch signal or not manual mode switch signal to unified meter C
and A/C amp. Then TCM receives signals from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The manual mode shift-up switch transmits manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.
Then TCM receives signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. TM
• The manual mode shift-down switch transmits manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C
amp. Then TCM receives signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The paddle shifter transmits shift up and shift down switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. Then TCM
receives signals from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. (With paddle shifter) E
• The TCM transmits manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
line.
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

G
when...
H
• TCM monitors manual mode,
non manual mode, up or
(These switches circuit is
down switch signal, and de-
open or shorted.)
tects as irregular when im- I
• Manual mode select switch
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit possible input pattern occurs
(Into A/T shift selector)
2 second or more.
• Manual mode position select
• When shift up/down signal of
switch (Into A/T shift selector)
paddle shifter continuously
• Paddle shifter*
J
remains ON for 60 seconds.*
*: With paddle shifter
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and L
>> GO TO 2. M
With CONSULT-III N
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds.
O
SLCT LVR POSI :D
MANU MODE SW : ON
P

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW”* and “SFT DWN ST SW”* with “Data Monitor”.
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.
Item Monitor Item Condition Status

Manual shift gate side (neutral) ON
MANU MODE SW
Other than the above OFF
Manual shift gate side OFF
NON M-MODE SW
Other than the above ON
Manual mode switch
Selector lever: UP (+ side) ON
UP SW LEVER
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) ON
DOWN SW LEVER
Paddle shifter: UP (+ side) ON
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter*
Paddle shifter: DOWN (− side) ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Without CONSULT-III
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
3. *Shift the paddle shifter to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. *Shift the paddle shifter to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
Which item is abnormal?
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 9.
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector.
4. Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
2
M137 4 Battery voltage
3
5
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
3.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH A

Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-128, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 4. B
4.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
C
Check the following.
• Check terminals of A/T shift selector harness connector and harness cladding for damage.
• Check connector for loose connection.
Is the inspection result normal? TM
YES >> GO TO 17.
E
5.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
F
Continuity
M137 4 Existed G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
6.CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. I

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal J
1
Ground
2
M137 Battery voltage K
3
5
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (STEP 1) M
2. Disconnect unified meter and A/C amp. connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter N
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness O

connector Continuity
1 10 P
2 25
M137 M66 Existed
3 5
5 11
YES >> GO TO 8.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (STEP 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
Ground
2
M137 Not existed
3
5
YES >> GO TO 16.
9.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M38 3 1
Battery voltage
M39 3 1
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 12.
10.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER
Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-128, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]", TM-128, "Compo-
nent Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]".
YES >> GO TO 11.
• Check terminals of paddle shifter connector for damage.
YES >> GO TO 17.
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M38 1
Existed
M39 1
YES >> GO TO 13.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
13.CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT A

Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Voltage (Approx.) B
Connector Terminal
Ground
M38 3
Battery voltage
M39 3 C
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 14. TM
14.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN PADDLE SHIFTER AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (PART 1)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
3. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and
A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
F
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
M38 3 6
M66 Existed
M39 3 26 H
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I
J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground K
M38 3
Not existed
M39 3
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M

• Check terminals of unified meter and A/C amp. connector for damage.
N
YES >> GO TO 17.
O
17.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
1. Reconnect all the connectors. P
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW”* and
“ST SFT DWN SW”* on “Data Monitor” mode for “METER/M&A”, and check the On/Off operations of each
monitor item. Refer to MWI-93, "Reference Value".
YES >> GO TO 18.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-175, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000003838910
1.CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A/T shift selector harness connector

Condition Continuity
Connector Terminal
Selector lever: Manual (Neutral) Existed
1
Other than the above Not existed
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
2
M137 4
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
3
Selector lever: “D” position (Auto) Existed
5
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] INFOID:0000000003838911

Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals.
Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector

Connector Terminal
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is
Existed
M38 1 3 pulled.
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-188, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000005151176
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN)

Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals.
Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector

Connector Terminal
Paddle shifter (shift-down)
Existed
M39 1 3 is pulled.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
YES >> INSPECTION END A
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (shift-down). Refer to TM-188, "Exploded View".
TM

P2713 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID D
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the high and low
reverse clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D open or shorted.)
when the high and low reverse
solenoid valve

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd
With GST


P2722 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID E
A
• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis- B
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the low brake so-
lenoid valve monitor value is 0.4
(Solenoid valve circuit is F
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E A or less when the low brake
open or shorted.)
solenoid valve command value
is more than 0.75 A.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

CAUTION:
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”. K
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more L

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more M
With GST
P

P2731 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID F
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the 2346 brake
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F 0.4 A or less when the 2346
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
With GST
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".


P2807 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID G
A
• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans- B
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the direct clutch
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G 0.4 A or less when the direct
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE: H
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION K
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”. L

M
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
N
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. O
NO >> INSPECTION END P



MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Supply power to TCM. B

1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE C

2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. TM
4. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector E

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5
1 F
10
5
F51 2 Battery voltage
10
G
5
6
10
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
J
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
5 K
F51 Existed
10
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT M
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector N

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Ground
O
6
Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
terminal 2.
• Harness for short or open between push-button ignition switch and A/T assembly vehicle side
harness connector terminals 1 and 6.
• 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box)

• 10A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Push-button ignition switch. Refer to PG-61, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
• Check terminals of A/T assembly connector for damage.

SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A
TCM transmit the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. by CAN communication line. Then manual B
mode switch position is indicated on the shift position indicator.
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000003838915
C
1.CHECK A/T INDICATOR
2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the shift position indi- TM
cator mutually coincide.
3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the actual gear position and the indication of the
position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)” E
side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Go to TM-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. H
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI”
mutually coincide. Refer to TM-151, "Reference Value". I
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-151, "Reference Value".
J
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear K
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-128, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-75, "CONSULT-III L
Function (TRANSMISSION)".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-75, "CONSULT-III Function M
(TRANSMISSION)".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-75, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)". N
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>•Check the
unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-4, "Work flow".
O

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift lock system circuit consists of the following part.
Component Function
Activated by the push-button ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of
Shift lock solenoid
sliders A and B.
Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then power is applied to shift
Shift lock relay
lock solenoid.
Stop lamp switch Depressing the brake pedal turns ON the stop lamp switch and energizes the shift lock relay.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003838918
TM
P
JCDWM0313GB

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JCDWM0314GB

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM
JCDWM0315GB
P
1.CHECK A/T SHIFT LOCK OPERATION (PART 1)

2. Shift the selector lever to “P” position.
3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.
Can the selector lever be shifted to any other position?

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
NO >> GO TO 2.
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check the selector lever position for damage. Refer to TM-183, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to TM-183, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground.
Shift lock relay harness connector

Connector Terminal
Ground
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
E52 2
Released brake pedal. 0V
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO-1 >> When pressing the brake pedal, the voltage is 0 V: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> When releasing the brake pedal, the voltage is battery voltage: GO TO 5.
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector.
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector

Voltage (Approx.)
E110 3 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 4.
• 10 A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
• Harness for short to ground or open between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector
terminal 8F and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal 3.
• Harness for short to ground or open between battery and fuse block (J/B).
• Harness for short to ground between battery and ICC brake hold relay vehicle side harness con-
nector terminal 7. [With ICC (Full Speed Range) System]
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Check stop lamp switch. Refer to TM-145, "Component Inspection (Stop lamp switch)".
YES >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts.
• Harness for short to ground or open between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
terminal 4 and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 2.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
• Harness for short to ground between ICC brake hold relay vehicle side harness connector termi-
nal 6 and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 2. [With ICC (Full Speed A
Range) System]
5.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH B
C
YES-1 >> Without ICC (Full Speed Range) System: Repair or replace harness between stop lamp switch
and shift lock relay.
YES-2 >> With ICC (Full Speed Range) System: GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TM
6.CHECK DTC WITH ICC (FULL SPEED RANGE) SYSTEM
With CONSULT-III E
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ICC”.
Is any malfunction detected?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-158, "DTC Index". F
NO >> Repair or replace harness between stop lamp switch and shift lock relay.
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground. G
Shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector

Continuity H
E52 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY J
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-144, "Component Inspection (Shift lock relay)".
K
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK POWER SOURCE L
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
M
Voltage (Approx.)
E52 5 Battery voltage N
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check the following. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts. O
• Harness for short to ground or open between push-button ignition switch and fuse block (J/B).
• Harness for short to ground or open between fuse block (J/B) vehicle side harness connector P
terminal 4F and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 5.
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Continuity
M137 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-144, "Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid)".
• Harness for short to ground, short to power or open between shift lock relay vehicle side har-
ness connector terminal 3 and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal 8.
• Harness for short to ground, short to power or open between A/T shift selector harness conduc-
tor terminal 8 and shift lock unit harness connector terminal 3.
• Harness for open between A/T shift selector harness conductor terminal 4 and shift lock unit
harness connector terminal 4.
Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid) INFOID:0000000003838921

1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".
2. Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is
activated.
CAUTION:
Connect the fuse between the terminals when applying the voltage.
(+) (fuse) (−)

Shift lock unit connector Condition Status
Apply 12 V direct
Shift lock solenoid
M222 3 M222 4 current between ter-
operates
minals 3 and 4.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down?
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Shift lock relay) INFOID:0000000003838922
1.CHECK SHIFT LOCK RELAY

Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals.
CAUTION:
Shift lock relay connector

Connector Terminal
Apply 12 V direct current
Existed
E52 3 5 between terminals 1 and 2.
OFF Not existed
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Component Inspection (Stop lamp switch) INFOID:0000000003838923
A
Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
B
Stop lamp switch connector
Connector Terminal
C
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
E110 3 4
Released brake pedal. Not existed
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-18, "Exploded View".
E

SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Indicates selector lever position.

1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1)

2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position.
YES >> GO TO 2.
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting
switch in 1st position.

Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 10.

Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (−)
M137 10 4 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
M137 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 1) A

1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
B
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
C
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5. TM
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND BCM (PART 2)
E

Continuity F
M137 10 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-44, "Reference Value".
6.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH H
1. Disconnect shift position switch connector.

2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector harness connector terminals and shift position switch connec-
tor terminals. I
A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector

Condition Continuity J
7 Selector lever in “D” Existed
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
4 K
9 Selector lever in “M” Existed
2, 6 Selector lever in “N” Existed L
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 and “M” position. Not existed
M137 M221
3, 6 Selector lever in “D” Existed
M
2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed
10
4, 6 Selector lever in “R” Existed
2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 position. Not existed N
5, 6 Selector lever in “P” Existed
O
YES >> GO TO 7.
P
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICA-
TOR (PART 1)
1. Disconnect selector lever position indicator connector.
2. Check continuity between shift position switch harness connector terminals and selector lever position
indicator connector terminals.

Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector
Continuity
2 3
3 4
4 5
M221 5 M223 7 Existed
6 6
7 8
9 2
YES >> GO TO 8.
TOR (PART 2)
Check harness cladding between shift position switch connector and selector lever position indicator connec-
tor for damage.
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-149, "Component Inspection".
YES >> Check the following.
• Check terminals of A/T shift selector connector, shift position switch connector and selector
lever position indicator connector for damage.

Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (−)
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -".
11.CHECK SHIFT POSITION SWITCH
tor terminals.

A/T shift selector harness connector Shift position switch connector A

Continuity
10 Existed
7 B
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 Not existed
M137 M221
11 Existed
9
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 Not existed C
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View". TM
12.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDI-
CATOR (PART 1)
E
F
Continuity
10 1
G
M221 M223 Existed
11 9
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SHIFT POSITION SWITCH AND SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDI- I
CATOR (PART 2)
tor for damage. J
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View". K
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000003838927
L
Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION: M

Selector lever position indicator connector

Terminal Condition Status
Connector
(+) (fuse) (−)
Apply 12 V direct current be-
1 9 Illumination lamp turns on.
tween terminals 1 and 9.
Apply 12 V direct current be- “N” position indicator lamp
3
tween terminals 3 and 8. turns on.
Apply 12 V direct current be- “D” position indicator lamp
4
M223 8
Apply 12 V direct current be- “R” position indicator lamp
5
Apply 12 V direct current be- “P” position indicator lamp
7
Apply 12 V direct current be- “M” mode indicator lamp
6 2
NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".

TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000003838952
B
VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE: C
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical TM
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: E
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed F
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.) G
Approximately matches the speed-
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
ometer reading.
H
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
ometer reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer/Gear ratio
I
Approximately matches the engine
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
Revolution of front sun gear is indi-
F SUN GR REV During driving J
cated.
Revolution of front carrier is indi-
F CARR GR REV During driving
cated.
K
Closely matches the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
L
Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8
ACCELE POSI
Fully depressed accelerator pedal 8.0/8
Released accelerator pedal 0.0/8 M
THROTTLE POSI
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
ATF TEMP 1 Ignition switch ON
indicated. N
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V O
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
P
Slip lock-up is active 0.2 – 0.8 A
TCC SOLENOID Lock-up is active 0.8 A
Other than the above 0A
Low brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
L/B SOLENOID
Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A

TCM
Item name Condition Value / Status (Approx.)
Front brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
FR/B SOLENOID
Front brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
HLR/C SOL
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
Direct clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
D/C SOLENOID
Direct clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A
2346 brake engaged 0.6 – 0.8 A
2346/B SOL
2346 brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOL MON Lock-up is active 0.8 A
L/B SOL MON
FR/B SOL MON
HLR/C SOL MON
I/C SOL MON
D/C SOL MON
2346/B SOL MON
Driving with1GR 4.924
Driving with 2GR 3.194
GEAR RATIO Driving with 4GR 1.412
Changes the value according to
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
the acceleration or deceleration.
ENG TORQUE D During driving
INPUT TRQ S During driving
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
TRGT PRES L/P
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa

TCM
A
Low brake engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake disengaged 0 kPa
Front brake engaged 1370 kPa B
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake disengaged 0 kPa
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 kPa C
Input clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch engaged 0 kPa
TM
Direct clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch engaged 0 kPa
2346 brake engaged 1370 kPa E
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
F
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
ometer reading.
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions ON
RANGE SW 4 G
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions ON
RANGE SW 3
Other than the above OFF H
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions ON
RANGE SW 2
I
Selector lever in “P” position ON
RANGE SW 1
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON J
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
SFT UP ST SW K
DOWN SW LEVER
Other than the above OFF L
UP SW LEVER
M
NON M-MODE SW
MANU MODE SW N
Driving with DS mode ON
DS RANGE
Other than the above OFF O
Selector lever in “1” position ON
1 POSITION SW
P
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
OD CONT SW
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
Depressed brake pedal ON
BRAKESW
Released brake pedal OFF
Power mode ON
POWERSHIFT SW

TCM
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
ASCD-OD CUT
ASCD operate ON
ASCD-CRUISE
ABS operate ON
ABS SIGNAL
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
TCS GR/P KEEP
When the reception value of A/T shift schedule change
ON
TCS SIGNAL 2 demand signal is “cold”
ON
TCS SIGNAL 1 demand signal is “warm”
At 4GR - 5GR - 6GR shift control FAIL
LOW/B PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
IC/FRB PARTS
HLR/C PARTS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal OFF
Released accelerator pedal ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal OFF
Depressed accelerator pedal DRIVE
DRV CST JUDGE
Released accelerator pedal COAST

TCM
A
When the selector lever is positioned in between each po-
OFF
sition
Selector lever in “P” position P
B
Selector lever in “R” position R
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position C
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “D” position: 6GR 6
TM
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3 E

Selector lever in “M” position:1GR M1 F
Selector lever in “M” position: 2GR M2
G
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR M6 H
Driving with DS mode DS
I
STARTER RELAY
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON J
F-SAFE IND/L
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
ATF WARN LAMP K
Driving with manual mode ON
MANU MODE IND
Other than the above OFF L
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions
ON
ON OFF SOL MON Driving with 1GR to 3GR
M
START RLY MON
N
ON
ON OFF SOL Driving with 1GR to 3GR
Other than the above OFF O

TCM
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
Selector lever in “M” position: 6GR 6
SLCT LVR POSI
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
SHIFT MODE
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
At 1GR - 2GR shift control FAIL
D/C PARTS
At control fixed to 1GR FAIL
FR/B PARTS
2346/B PARTS
2346B/DC PARTS
TERMINAL LAYOUT
SCIA1658E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Condition Value (Approx.)
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output
1 Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

Ground Power supply Input
(Y) Ignition switch OFF 0V
2 Power supply
Ground Input Always Battery voltage
(BR) (Memory back-up)
3 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
4 Input/
— K-line — —
(V) Output

TCM
Terminal
Description
(Wire color) A
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output
5 B
Ground Ground Output Always 0V
(B)

Ground Power supply Input C
7 Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON
(R) Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
TM
8 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
Selector lever in “N” and “P” po- E
9 Battery voltage
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON sitions.
(GR)
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
10 F
(B)

TCM
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000003838953
JCDWM0303GB

TCM
TM
JCDWM0304GB

TCM
JCDWM0305GB

TCM
TM
JCDWM0306GB

TCM
JCDWM0307GB
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005151178
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st Fail-Safe, 2nd
Fail-Safe and Final Fail-Safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.

TCM
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-8, "Diagnosis
Flow". A
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd Fail-Safe early. It shifts to 2nd Fail-Safe or Final Fail-Safe after the vehicle stopped.
B
The mode that the vehicle shifts to Final Fail-Safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunc-
2nd fail-safe
tioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st and 2nd Fail-Safe are not used, and
C
Final fail-safe then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION TM
Vehicle
DTC Vehicle behavior for 1st fail-safe Vehicle behavior for 2nd fail-safe Vehicle behavior for final fail-safe
condition
E
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position (The • Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed) shifting can be performed) F
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• Lock-up is prohibited • Lock-up is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears • The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per- of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per- G
formed formed
P0705 — —
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF H
• Starter relay is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled) (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock I
Between • The shifting between the gears
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed —
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears J
P0710 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
Between • Manual mode is prohibited
• Fix the gear while driving
the gears of —
• Manual mode is prohibited
4-5-6-7 K
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited • The shifting between the gears
P0717 of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed L
the gears of —
4-5-6-7
M
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
Between
the gears of —
• Treat the vehicle speed that the N
1-2-3
vehicle speed signal receives as • The shifting between the gears
P0720 positive of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
Between • Manual mode is prohibited O
the gears of • Treat the vehicle speed that the —
4-5-6-7 vehicle speed signal receives as
positive
P

TCM
Vehicle
condition
• Locks in 1GR
Neutral • The shifting between the gears
malfunction of 1 - 2 can be performed
• Locks in 4GR
between • The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited —
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
1 - 2 - 3 and • The shifting between the gears
7 of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
P0729 • Manual mode is prohibited
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 • The shifting between the gears
• Driving with the gear ratio be-
P0734 of 1 - 2 can be performed
tween 1GR and 2GR
tween 2GR and 3GR • The shifting between the gears
Other than • The shifting between the gears
• Locks in 3GR of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
the above of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 can be performed
• Neutral
of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
• Locks in 1GR
• Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 can be performed
P0730 — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral • The shifting between the gears
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited
P0744 — —
• Locks in 1GR
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed
P2713 — 6GR or 7GR — • The shifting between the gears
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
P2807 of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be per-
formed
P0780 — — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
• Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped-
al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited is released is prohibited is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Locks in 1GR
• Neutral
• Driving with the gear ratio be- • The shifting between the gears
P1730 — tween 2GR and 3GR of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited

TCM
Vehicle
condition A
Paddle
switch mal- Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
function B
Gate switch
P1815 Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
malfunction
Malfunction C
of both Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
switches
Between • The shifting between the gears TM
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed — • The shifting between the gears
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
U1000 • Line pressure is set to the maxi-
Between mum hydraulic pressure
• Fix the gear at driving E
the gears of — • Manual mode is prohibited
4 - 5 -6 - 7
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR F
P1721
Protection Control INFOID:0000000003960489

G
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control. H
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more. I
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Control at malfunction Neutral J
• Vehicle speed: 8 km/h (5 MPH) or less
Normal return condition
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
K
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL L

Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position or 1GR. M
• Select lever and gear: Except for “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH) N
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than malfunction detection condition
O
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub- P
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.
TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less

TCM
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Normal return condition and
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000003838955
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• P0615 STATER RELAY
• P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A
• P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A
• P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
• P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
• P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER
• P0745 PC SOLENOID A
2
• P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
• P0775 PC SOLENOID B
• P0795 PC SOLENOID C
• P2713 PC SOLENOID D
• P2722 PC SOLENOID E
• P2731 PC SOLENOID F
• P2807 PC SOLENOID G
• P0729 6GR INCORRECT RATIO
• P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO
3 • P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
• P0780 SHIFT
• P1730 INTERLOCK
• P0725 ENGINE SPEED
• P1705 TP SENSOR
4
• P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
• P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
DTC Index INFOID:0000000003838956
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “U1000 CAN COMM
CIRCUIT”. Refer to TM-81, "Description".
DTC*2
Items
Reference
(CONSULT-III screen terms) MIL*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III only
CONSULT-III or GST “TRANSMISSION”
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-82
T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-84
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-85
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-87
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-89
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-91
6GR INCORRECT RATIO P0729 P0729 TM-93

TCM
DTC*2
Items A
Reference
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-95 B
3GR INCORRECT RATIO P0733 P0733 TM-100 C
TM
TORQUE CONVERTER P0740 P0740 TM-106
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-109 E
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-110
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-112
F
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-113
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-114
TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-115 G
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-117
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-119
H
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-123
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-130 I
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-131
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-132
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-133 J
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-81
*1: Refer to TM-74, "Diagnosis Description".
K
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
IGN COUNTER
IGN counter indicates the number of items that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected. L
• CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition M
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
• Except for CAN malfunction
- The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now. N
- The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...254 → 255 after returning to the normal condition whenever ignition
switch OFF → ON.
- The number is fixed to 255 until self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 255. O

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000003838961
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
CAUTION:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01A transmission, replace the A/T assembly.
Diagnostic item
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve

Accelerator pedal position sensor
Torque converter solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Anti-interlock solenoid valve

Direct clutch solenoid valve
Transmission range switch
Front brake solenoid valve
Input clutch solenoid valve
2346 brake solenoid valve

Low brake solenoid valve
Output speed sensor
Vehicle speed signal
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Control linkage
TM-183
TM-109
TM-106
TM-131
TM-130
TM-133
TM-132
TM-117
TM-115
TM-114
TM-112
TM-110
TM-89
TM-91
TM-87
TM-85
TM-84
TM-81
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
→ “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5
→ “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
Driving When 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
perfor- Large shift-
mance 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
shock ing
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
perfor-
mance Downshift when accel-
erator pedal is de- 2 1 4 2 2 3
pressed
Upshift when acceler-
2 1 4 2 2 3
ator pedal is released
Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1
Strange noise
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1

ble
Func-
tion trou-
Gear
change
does no
Revision: 2009 March

tion
tion
“D” posi-
“M” posi-
Symptom
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 7GR
5GR → 6GR
4GR → 5GR
3GR → 4GR
2GR → 3GR
1GR → 2GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
Locks in 5GR
Locks in 1GR
Does not lock-up

1 TM-89
2
2
2
2
2
1
Output speed sensor
2
1
1
TM-91 Engine speed signal
1
TM-87 Input speed sensor
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-169
2
2
2
1
TM-85 A/T fluid temperature sensor
2
2
2
1
1
3
TM-135 Battery voltage
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-84 transmission range switch
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TM-123 Manual mode switch
TM-145 Stop lamp switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-109 Line pressure solenoid valve
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-106 Torque converter solenoid valve
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-131 Low brake solenoid valve
1
1
1
1
Diagnostic item
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-114 Front brake solenoid valve
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
TM-130 High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
TM-112 Input clutch solenoid valve

1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
TM-133 Direct clutch solenoid valve
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-132 2346 brake solenoid valve

1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-110 Anti-interlock solenoid valve

1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
TM-81 CAN communication

[7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
2009 FX35/FX50
I
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
ble
Func-
tion trou-
Poor
shifting

not
En-
gine
work
does
Slip
brake
Symptom
ing gears
When shift-
“M” position
“D” position → “M” position
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 5GR
7GR → 6GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
TM-183 Control linkage
TM-170
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
TM-89 Output speed sensor
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TM-84 Transmission range switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1

TM-106 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
2
1

Diagnostic item

2
1

2
1

1
2
2
1

2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1

2
1

3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2

[7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
2009 FX35/FX50
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item
A

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
B



C
Output speed sensor
Manual mode switch
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Control linkage
TM
TM-183
TM-123
TM-109
TM-106
TM-131
TM-130
TM-133
TM-132
TM-114
TM-112
TM-110
TM-89
TM-91
TM-87
TM-85
TM-84
TM-81
F
With selector lever in
“D” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
tion is extremely poor.
G
“R” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
H
While starting off by
Poor
accelerating in 1st, 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
power
engine races.
trans- Slip
mis- While accelerating in I
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
sion 2GR, engine races.
While accelerating in
Func- 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2 J
3GR, engine races.
tion trou-
ble While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
4GR, engine races.
While accelerating in K
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
5GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
6GR, engine races. L
Poor While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
power 7GR, engine races.
trans- Slip M
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
mis-
sion No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extremely large
1 N
creep.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item




Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal

Symptom
Stop lamp switch

Control linkage
Battery voltage
Starter relay
TM-183
TM-135
TM-145
TM-109
TM-106
TM-131
TM-130
TM-133
TM-132
TM-115
TM-114
TM-112
TM-110
TM-89
TM-91
TM-84
TM-82
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Driving is not possible in “D” posi-
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
tion.
Driving is not possible in “R” posi-
3 2 1 1 1
tion.
Power transmis-
Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1
sion cannot be
performed Engine stalls when selector lever
3 4 4 2 1
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”.
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
3 1 2 1
position.
Function
Engine starts in position other than
trouble 3 2 1
“N” or “P”.
Vehicle does not enter parking con-
1 2
dition.
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2
Vehicle runs with A/T in “P” position. 1 2
Poor operation Vehicle moves forward with the “R”
1 2
position.
Vehicle moves backward with the
1 2
“D” position.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004040632
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. TM
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) I
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000003838964
K
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
L
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
N
SEF289H
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION O

PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids P
and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
SEF217U
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced.
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to TM-
174, "Service Notice or Precaution".
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-176, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehi-
cle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selec-
tor lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction resulting the damage of parts.
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000003838965
ATF COOLER SERVICE

If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced,
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to TM-179,
"Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000003838967
B
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
A/T fluid changing and adjustment
B2318N3301* TM
Vacuum hose
Inside dia.: 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
Outside dia.: 7.5 mm (0.30 in)
Length: 5.0 m (16.4 ft) E
JSDIA0862ZZ
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts

F
PBIC0190E
H
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000003838969
1. 1st Step
a. Cut the vacuum hose (B2318N3301) (A) by 20 mm (0.79 in) to fit
in at the top of the ATF exchanger pipe (B) as shown in the fig-
ure.
JSDIA0861GB
2. 2nd Step
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less.
b. Lift up the vehicle.
c. Remove the drain plug from the oil pan, and then drain the ATF.
d. When the ATF starts to drop, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan.
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
f. Insert the own made tube into the overflow plug hole, and then fill approximately 3 liters (3-1/8 US qt, 2-5/
8 lmp qt) of the ATF.
g. Temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan.
CAUTION:
Quickly remove the own made tube from the overflow plug hole. Otherwise, the ATF may leak.
h. Lift down the vehicle.
i. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
j. Stop the engine.
3. 3rd Step
a. Repeat the “2nd Step”.
4. Final Step
CAUTION:
• Tighten the drain plug into the oil pan to the specified torque.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket.
CAUTION:
i. Start the engine.
j. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).

A/T FLUID
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP A
1” of Data Monitor using CONSULT-III.
k. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
l. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. B
m. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.
n. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug into the oil pan to the specified torque. C
CAUTION:
Never reuse overflow plug.
TM
ATF : Refer to TM-205, "General Specification".
Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-205, "General Specification".
CAUTION: E
• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Never mix with other ATF.
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/
T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited
warranty. F
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
• Never reuse drain plug gasket.
G
Drain plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-189, "Exploded
View".
Overflow plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-189, "Exploded H
View".
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005151188 I
CAUTION:
Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking with
CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed. J
1. Cut the vacuum hose (B2318N3301) (A) by 20 mm (0.79 in) to fit
ure. K
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE: L
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of Data Monitor
using CONSULT-III. M
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
JSDIA0861GB
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec-
tor lever in “P” position. N
6. Lift up the vehicle.
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. O
9. Insert the own made tube into the overflow plug hole, and then fill approximately 0.5 liters (4/8 US qt, 4/8
lmp qt) of the ATF.
10. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the own made tube from the overflow plug hole. If the ATF does P
not leak, refill the ATF.
11. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug into the oil pan to the specified torque.
CAUTION:

A/T FLUID
Overflow plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-189, "Exploded

View".

A/T FLUID COOLER
A/T FLUID COOLER
A
Cleaning INFOID:0000000003940536
Whenever an A/T is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. B
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either case, mal-
function of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler C
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CLEANING PROCEDURE
TM
1. Position an oil pan under the A/T inlet and outlet cooler hoses.
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses E
from the steel cooler tubes or by-pass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting. F
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the
oil pan.
G
JPDIA0711GB H
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission

Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out- I
let hose.
CAUTION:
• Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner. J
• Spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner only with adequate
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin. K
• Never breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmis- JPDIA0712GB
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet L
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet M
hose.
9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi)
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any N
remaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T O
fluid cooler steel lines to the A/T.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. JPDIA0713GB
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T P
by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform “DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.

A/T FLUID COOLER
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler out-
let hose.
CAUTION:
Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
ventilation.
• Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
sion Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
JPDIA0714GB
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF into
the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform “INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
JPDIA0715GB
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended.
SCIA2967E

A/T FLUID COOLER
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in A
the coffee filter, the A/T fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T
fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection proce-
dure is ended. Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
B
SCIA7031E
TM
Inspection INFOID:0000000003940537
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
E

STALL TEST
STALL TEST
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000003838972
INSPECTION
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary.
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test.
Stall speed : Refer to TM-206, "Stall Speed".

7. Shift the selector lever to “N” position.
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION:
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST
Selector lever position

Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R”
• Low brake
H O • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch
• Reverse brake
Stall speed O H • 1st one-way clutch
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage

A/T POSITION
A/T POSITION
A
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003838980
INSPECTION B
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. C
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown TM
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly is shown in the figure. E
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking. F
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do not
illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in G
the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” JSDIA0790GB
H
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is
moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
I
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in J
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
K
1. Loosen nut ( ).
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” posi- L
tion direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-184,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lower M
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of N
approximately 1 kg (9.8 N). JPDIA0885ZZ

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000003838982
JSDIA1352GB

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate A

4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher
7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket
10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer B
13. Collar 14. Pivot pin 15. Insulator
16. Shift lock unit 17. A/T shift selector assembly 18. Adapter
: Apply multi-purpose grease. C
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure.
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003838983

TM
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position. E
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector.
4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward. F
5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).
6. Remove selector lever knob.
G
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded
View".
CAUTION:
When disconnecting selector lever position indicator con- H
nector from shift position switch, never twist or apply an
excessive load to the connector.
8. Remove rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-11, "Exploded JPDIA0898ZZ
I
View".
9. Disconnect A/T shift selector harness connector.
10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly. J
12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it right- K
ward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
14. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.
L
15. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
16. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate.
M
17. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.
18. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel.
19. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher N
assembly. JPDIA0055ZZ
a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly.

Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
O
b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly.
c. Remove selector lever position indicator.
INSTALLATION P
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin.
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal.
• Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly.
1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob.
2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt.
CAUTION:

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it.
• Never press selector button.
• When installing control rod to A/T shift selector assembly, refer to “ADJUSTMENT”. Refer to TM-183,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Check A/T positions. Refer to TM-183, "Inspection and Adjustment".

CONTROL ROD
CONTROL ROD
A
TM
G
JSDIA1002GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer

4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator
H
7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
I

J
REMOVAL
K
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector and control rod. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".
3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
4. Remove control rod from manual lever. L
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: M
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the con-
trol rod.
N
O
P

PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
JPDIA0051GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up)

REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter.
3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

OIL PAN
OIL PAN
A
TM
J
JPDIA0853GB
1. A/T 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan K

4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. L
M
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". N
3. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connectors (A).
: Vehicle front O
: Bolt
4. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1). P

5. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM-199, "2WD
: Exploded View" (2WD), TM-202, "AWD : Exploded View"
(AWD).
SCIA8269E

OIL PAN
6. Remove clips (1).
: Vehicle front
: Oil pan mounting bolt
7. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.

8. Remove magnets from oil pan.
JSDIA0793ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the mag-
net, and then assemble.
• Refer to the followings when installing oil pan (2) (with oil pan gas-
ket) and clips (1) to transmission case.
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts.
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface of transmission case
and oil pan. JSDIA0793ZZ
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical
order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
: Vehicle front
• Pour ATF into A/T assembly after completing installation. Refer to

TM-176, "Changing".
JSDIA0794ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal-
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-179, "Cleaning".
SCIA5199E

Check A/T fluid leakage.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION

OIL PAN
Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-177, "Adjustment".
A
TM

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
2WD
2WD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003839011
JPDIA0864GB
1. Air breather vent 2. A/T assembly 3. Air breather hose

4. Clip 5. Air breather tube
A. To water outlet (rear)
2WD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003839012
REMOVAL
1. Remove air breather vent from water outlet (rear).
2. Remove air breather hose.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When installing air breather hose, be careful not to crushed or blocked by folding or bending the
hose.
• When inserting air breather hose to air breather vent, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches
the tube bend “R” portion.
• Install air breather hose to air breather vent so that the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing air breather hose to brackets.
AWD

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AWD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000003839013
TM
JPDIA0865GB
G
1. Air breather vent 2. A/T assembly 3. Air breather hose
4. Clip 5. Air breather tube
A. To water outlet (rear)
H
AWD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000003839014
I
REMOVAL
1. Remove air breather vent from water outlet (rear).
J
2. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-107, "VQ35HR : Exploded View".
INSTALLATION K
CAUTION:
• When installing air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the L
hose.
• When inserting air breather hose to the air breather vent (for
A/T) (1), be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube
bend “R” portion. M
2 : Air breather vent (for transfer)

• Install air breather hose to air breather vent (for A/T) so that N
the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing
air breather hose to brackets. O
JPDIA0868ZZ

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
2WD
JPDIA0856GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube

4. A/T fluid cooler tube 5. Clip 6. Bracket
7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose B 9. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator
REMOVAL
1. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-29, "Exploded View".
2. Remove engine lower cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B.
4. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly.
5. Plug up opening such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
6. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tube.
7. Remove clips and bracket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never reuse copper washer.
• Refer to the following when installing A/T fluid cooler hoses.

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp* A

Radiator assembly side Facing backward A
A/T fluid cooler hose A
A/T fluid cooler tube side Facing downward B
B
Radiator assembly side Facing downward C
A/T fluid cooler hose B
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. C
- The illustrations indicate the view from the hose ends.
D : Vehicle front
TM
E : Vehicle upper
- When installing hose clamps center line of each hose clamp tab
should be positioned as shown in the figure. E
F
JSDIA0795ZZ
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hoses according to dimension (L) described below. G
(1) (2) Tube type Dimension (L)

Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end. H
A/T fluid cooler hose A 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
A/T fluid cooler tube side B
(D).]
I
Radiator assembly side C Insert the hose until the hose touches the radiator.
A/T fluid cooler hose B 30 mm (1.18 in) [End reaches the 2-stage bulge
(D).]
J
JSDIA0882ZZ
M
- Set hose clamps (1) at the both ends of A/T fluid cooler hoses (2)
with dimension (A) from the hose edge. N
Dimension A : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. O
SCIA8123E
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003839017

Check for A/T fluid leakage.

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
AWD
JPDIA0854GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube

7. Bracket 8. Hose clamp 9. A/T fluid cooler hose B
10. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator
REMOVAL
2. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
3. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B.
4. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector. Refer to TM-184, "Exploded View".
5. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
6. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
A
: Vehicle front
: Bolt
B
7. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 harness (B) from clips (1).
8. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to EX-5,
"Exploded View". C
9. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-124, "Exploded
View".
SCIA8269E
10. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-107, "VQ35HR : TM
Exploded View".
11. Lift up a transmission jack to make the gap between converter housing of A/T assembly and front suspen-
sion member. E
CAUTION:
Never contact the A/T and transfer assembly with the lower lever of A/T shift selector when lifting
up a transmission jack.
12. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly. F
14. Remove clips and brackets.
G
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
I
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*

J
K
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab. L
D : Vehicle front M
E : Vehicle upper
should be positioned as shown in the figure. N
O
JSDIA0795ZZ
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hoses according to dimension (L) described below. P

Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius curve end.
(D).]

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
(D).]
JSDIA0882ZZ
with dimension (A) from the hose edge.
Dimension A : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube.
SCIA8123E
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003839020


TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

2WD
B
TM
J
JPDIA0850GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Harness bracket 3. Harness bracket K

4. Harness bracket 5. Harness bracket
A. For tightening torque, refer to TM-199, "2WD : Removal and Installation".
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbols in the figure. L
M
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS)
from the A/T assembly. N
• Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then release the parking brake.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. O
3. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-187, "Exploded View".
4. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-116, "Exploded View".
P
5. Remove engine lower cover with power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
6. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-13, "Exploded View".
7. Remove exhaust mounting bracket. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
8. Remove three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
9. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Refer to EM-117, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it.

• Never disassemble.
• Never allow metal filings, etc. to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area.
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-17, "VQ35HR : Exploded View".
11. Remove rear plate cover. Refer to EM-46, "Exploded View".
12. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION:
When turning the crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
13. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly. Refer to TM-194, "2WD :
Exploded View".
14. Plug up openings such as the A/T fluid cooler tube hole.
15. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack.
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
16. Remove rear engine mounting member and engine mounting insulator (rear) with power tool. Refer to
EM-82, "2WD : Exploded View".
17. Disconnect A/T assembly connector.
18. Remove harness and harness brackets.
19. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly with power tool.
20. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-192, "2WD : Exploded View".
21. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
22. Remove dynamic damper. Refer to EM-82, "2WD : Exploded
View".
SCIA0499E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check fitting of dowel pin ( ) when installing A/T assembly to
engine assembly.
JPDIA0900ZZ

• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, be sure to
check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit. A
B : Scale
C : Straightedge B
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-207, "Torque Convert-

er". C
JPDIA0042ZZ
TM
• When installing A/T assembly to the engine assembly, attach the
fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard.
E
Bolt symbol A B
A/T assembly to engine as- Engine assembly to A/T as-
Insertion direction
sembly sembly F
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
mm (in) G
Tightening torque JPDIA0851ZZ
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily H
tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. I
• When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley
bolts, be sure to confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. Refer to
EM-53, "Exploded View".
J
• Rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that A/T rotates freely without binding after
converter is installed to drive plate.
2WD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003839023
K

Check the following items. L
• A/T fluid leakage.
• A/T position. Refer to TM-183, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION M
AWD
N

JPDIA0849GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Harness bracket 3. Harness bracket

4. Harness bracket 5. Harness bracket
A. For tightening torque, Refer to TM-202, "AWD : Removal and Installation".
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
from the A/T assembly.
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
3. Remove control rod. Refer to TM-187, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-107, "VQ35HR : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug and
overflow plug.
CAUTION:
• Never place in an area affected by magnetism.
8. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-17, "VQ35HR : Exploded View".

10. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter. A
CAUTION:
11. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes. Refer to TM-196, "AWD : Exploded View". B
13. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and AWD solenoid harness connector.
14. Remove harness and harness brackets. C
16. Remove air breather hose. Refer to TM-193, "AWD : Exploded View".
TM
17. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack. E
18. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool.
Refer to DLN-63, "VQ35HR : Exploded View".
F
G
SCIA2203E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and Install in the reverse order of removal. H
CAUTION:
engine assembly.
I
JPDIA0900ZZ
L
check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
M
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
N
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-207, "Torque Converter".
O
JPDIA0042ZZ

Bolt symbol A B
A/T assembly to engine as- Engine assembly to A/T as-
Insertion direction
sembly sembly
Number of bolts 8 4
Bolt length (L)
65 (2.56) 35 (1.38)
mm (in)
Tightening torque JPDIA0851ZZ
75 (7.7, 55) 46.6 (4.8, 34)
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.
AWD : Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000003839026

Check the following item after completing installation.

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01A (VQ35HR)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000003839056
B
Applied model 2WD AWD

C
Transmission model code number 1XJ0A, 1XJ6C, 1XJ8E, 1RX3A 1XJ0B, 1XJ6D, 1XJ9A, 1RX3B
Stall torque ratio 1.92 : 1
1st 4.924 TM
2nd 3.194
3rd 2.043
E
4th 1.412
Transmission gear ratio
5th 1.000
6th 0.862 F
7th 0.772
Reverse 3.972
G
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
Fluid capacity 9.2 liter (9-3/4 US qt, 8-1/8 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION: H
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
I
• *1: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000003839057 J
2WD MODELS
Unit: km/h (MPH) K
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle
L
D1 → D2 58 – 62 (36 – 38) 24 – 28 (15 – 17)
D2 → D3 91 – 99 (57 – 61) 50 – 58 (31 – 36)
D3 → D4 143 – 153 (89 – 95) 81 – 91 (51 – 56) M
D4 → D5 209 – 219 (130 – 136) 116 – 126 (73 – 78)
D5 → D6 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 174 – 184 (109 – 114)
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 250 – 260 (156 – 161) N
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 201 – 211 (125 – 131)
D6 → D5 215 – 225 (134 – 139) 127 – 137 (79 – 85)
O
D5 → D4 197 – 207 (123 – 128) 75 – 85 (47 – 52)
D4 → D3 121 – 131 (76 – 81) 46 – 56 (29 – 34)
D3 → D2 70 – 78 (44 – 48) 22 – 30 (14 – 18) P
D2 → D1 23 – 27 (15 – 16) 8 – 12 (5 – 7)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening.
AWD MODELS

Unit: km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle
D1 → D2 52 – 56 (33 – 34) 22 – 26 (14 – 16)
D2 → D3 82 – 90 (51 – 55) 45 – 53 (28 – 32)
D3 → D4 129 – 139 (81 – 86) 73 – 83 (46 – 51)
D4 → D5 189 – 199 (118 – 123) 105 – 115 (66 – 71)
D5 → D6 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 157 – 167 (98 – 103)
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 237 – 247 (148 – 153)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 181 – 191 (113 – 118)
D6 → D5 195 – 205 (122 – 127) 115 – 125 (72 – 77)
D5 → D4 179 – 189 (112 – 117) 68 – 78 (43 – 48)
D4 → D3 119 – 129 (74 – 80) 42 – 52 (27 – 32)
D3 → D2 63 – 71 (40 – 44) 20 – 28 (13 – 17)
D2 → D1 21 – 25 (14 – 15) 7 – 11 (5 – 6)
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000003839058
2WD MODELS
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
Closed throttle 54 – 62 (34 – 38) 51 – 59 (32 – 36)
Half throttle 64 – 72 (40 – 44) 61 – 69 (38 – 42)
• At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. (Closed throttle position signal OFF)
AWD MODELS

Throttle position
Closed throttle 49 – 57 (31 – 35) 46 – 54 (29 – 33)
Half throttle 58 – 66 (37 – 41) 55 – 63 (35 – 39)
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000003839059
Stall speed 2,475 – 2,775 rpm
Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003839061
2WD MODELS
Name Condition Data (Approx.)

When running at 23 km/h (14 MPH) in 2nd speed witch the closed throttle position
Input speed sensor 1 0.8 kHz
signal OFF.
When running at 55 km/h (34 MPH) in 4th speed witch the closed throttle position
signal OFF.
AWD MODELS
Name Condition Data (Approx.) A

When running at 21 km/h (13 MPH) in 2nd speed witch the closed throttle position
signal OFF.
When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed witch the closed throttle position B
signal OFF.
Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000003839062

C

Output speed sensor When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 159 Hz TM
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000003839065
E
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 25.0 mm (0.98 in)

< BASIC INSPECTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
BASIC INSPECTION
Diagnosis Flow INFOID:0000000004040633
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

1. Refer to TM-209, "Question sheet" and interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (con-
ditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings
in the vehicle.
2. Check the following:
- Service history
- Harnesses and connectors malfunction. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Before checking the malfunction, check whether any DTC exists.
2. If DTC exists, perform the following operations.
- Record the DTC and freeze frame data. (Print out the data using CONSULT-III and affix to the Work Order
Sheet.)
- Erase DTCs.
- Check the relationship between the cause that is clarified with DTC and the malfunction information
described by the customer. TM-355, "Symptom Table" is effective.
3. Check the information of related service bulletins and others also.
Do malfunction information and DTC exist?
Malfunction information and DTC exists. >>GO TO 3.
Malfunction information exists, but no DTC. >>GO TO 4.
No malfunction information, but DTC exists. >>GO TO 5.
Check any malfunction described by a customer, except those with DTC on the vehicle.
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-209, "Question
sheet".
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 5.
Check the malfunction described by the customer on the vehicle.
When a malfunction symptom is reproduced, the question sheet is effective. Refer to TM-209, "Question
sheet".
tomer occurs.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” of the appropriate DTC to check if DTC is detected again.
Refer to TM-353, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" when multiple DTCs are detected, and then determine the
order for performing the diagnosis.
NOTE:
If no DTC is detected, refer to the freeze frame data.
YES >> GO TO 7.

NO >> Check according to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident".
6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” A
Use TM-355, "Symptom Table" from the symptom inspection result in step 4. Then identify where to start per-
forming the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
B
>> GO TO 8.
7.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS C
Repair or replace the detected malfunctioning parts.
Reconnect parts or connector after repairing or replacing, and then erase DTC if necessary.
TM
>> GO TO 8.
8.FINAL CHECK E
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again to make sure that the repair is correctly performed.
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3 or 4. F
Is DTC or malfunction symptom reproduced?
YES-1 >> DTC is reproduced: GO TO 5.
YES-2 >> Malfunction symptom is reproduced: GO TO 6. G
NO >> Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, make sure that DTC is erased.
Question sheet INFOID:0000000004040634
H
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that may cause a malfunction
of the transmission parts. By understanding those conditions prop- I
erly, a quick and exact diagnosis can be achieved.
In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. There-
fore, it is important to understand the symptom and status well
J
enough by asking the customer about the concerns carefully. In
order to systemize all the information for the diagnosis, prepare the
question sheet referring to the question points.
K
SEF907L
L
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
Question Sheet
M
Customer name MR/MS Engine # Manuf. Date
Incident Date VIN
Model & Year In Service Date N
Trans. Mileage km/Mile

Question Sheet
Symptoms Vehicle does not move ( Any position Particular position )
No up-shift ( 1st → 2nd 2nd → 3rd 3rd → 4th 4th → 5th 5th → 6th 6th →
7th)
No down-shift ( 7th → 6th 6th → 5th 5th → 4th 4th → 3rd 3rd → 2nd 2nd
→ 1st)
Lock-up malfunction
Shift point too high or too low
Shift shock or slip
Noise or vibration
No kick down
No pattern select
Others
Frequency All the time Under certain conditions Sometimes ( times a day)
Weather conditions Not affected
Weather Fine Clouding Raining Snowing Other ( )
Temp. [Approx. °C (
Temp. Hot Warm Cool Cold
°F)]
Humidity High Middle Low
Transmission conditions Not affected
Cold During warm-up After warm-up
Engine speed ( rpm)
Road conditions Not affected
In town In suburbs Freeway Off road (Up / Down)
Driving conditions Not affected
While cruis-
At starting While idling While engine racing At racing
ing
While accelerating While decelerating While turning (Right / Left)
Vehicle speed [ km/h ( MPH)]
Other conditions

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
B
TM
JSDIA1358GB J
K
Switch, Sensor or Signal TCM function Actuator

L
• Transmission range switch • Line pressure control (TM-214) • Input clutch solenoid valve
• Accelerator pedal position sig- • Shift change control (TM-218) • Direct clutch solenoid valve
nal • Shift pattern control • Front brake solenoid valve
• Closed throttle position signal - Shift pattern (TM-223) • High and low reverse clutch solenoid M
• Wide open throttle position sig- - Manual mode (TM-227) valve
nal • Lock-up control (TM-230) • Low brake solenoid valve
• Engine speed signal ⇒ • Fail-safe control (TM-349) ⇒ • Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
• A/T fluid temperature sensor • Self-diagnosis (TM-264) • Line pressure solenoid valve N
• Output speed sensor • CONSULT-III communication line (TM- • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
• Vehicle speed signal 264) • 2346 brake solenoid valve
• Manual mode switch signal • CAN communication line (TM-270) • A/T CHECK indicator lamp
• Stop lamp switch signal • Back-up lamp relay O
• Side G sensor signal • Starter relay
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION P
• The A/T senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the opti-
mum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
• Receive input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors.
• Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, etc.
• Transmit required output signals to the respective solenoids.

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
JSDIA0787ZZ
NOTE:
- TCM

A/T CONTROL SYSTEM
- A/T fluid temperature sensor A
- High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve B
- Low brake solenoid valve C
- Line pressure solenoid valve TM

E
Name Function F
TCM
Transmission range switch TM-273, "Description" G
TM-276, "Description" H
Input clutch solenoid valve TM-300, "Description" I
J
Anti-interlock solenoid valve TM-299, "Description" K
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-295, "Description" L
Accelerator pedal position sensor TM-303, "Description"
Manual mode switch TM-311, "Description"
M
Paddle shifter TM-311, "Description"
Starter relay TM-271, "Description"
A/T CHECK indicator lamp When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. N
Stop lamp switch TM-138, "Description"
O
Unified meter and A/C amp. MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-29, "System Description" P
Wheel sensor BRC-53, "Description"
Yaw rate/side G sensor BRC-79, "Description"

JSDIA1345GB

A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Line pressure solenoid valve
Engine speed signal* Line pressure control ↓
ECM
(Engine torque)*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• When an engine and A/T integrated control signal (engine torque) equivalent to the engine drive force is
transmitted from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid valve.
This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pres-
sure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving
state.
• The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the
driving state.
• In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM
controls the line pressure solenoid current value and thus controls the line pressure.
Normal Control

Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the
engine drive force. A
PCIA0008E
TM
Back-up Control (Engine Brake)
When the select operation is performed during driving and the A/T is
shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed.
E
G
PCIA0009E
During Shift Change H

The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set.
For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to engine
torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic cor-
responds to engine speed, during engine brake operation. I
PCIA0010E
O
At Low Fluid Temperature

When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed tempera-
ture, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line
pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic.
PCIA0011E
JSDIA0787ZZ

NOTE:
B
C
- TCM
TM
E
I
Name Function
TCM
J

TM-276, "Description" K
Line pressure solenoid valve TM-298, "Description" L
Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for
the driving state.
ECM EC-589, "System Description" M

JSDIA1346GB

Input speed sensor 1, 2 Input speed • High and low reverse
clutch solenoid valve
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature valve
Accelerator pedal position signal* • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Shift change control
ECM Closed throttle position signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so-
Engine and A/T integrated control signal lenoid valve
(Engine torque)* • Line pressure solenoid
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal* • Anti-interlock solenoid
valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the
clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes

possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change charac-
teristic is attained. A
PCIA0012E TM
Shift Change
The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque informa-
tion, etc. E
Shift Change System Diagram
PCIA0013E
*1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil K
pressure in real-time to achieve the best gear ratio.
Blipping Control
This system makes transmission clutch engage readily by controlling (synchronizing) engine revolution L
according to the (calculation of) engine revolution after shifting down.
• “BLIPPING CONTROL” functions.
- When downshifting by accelerator pedal depression. M
- When downshifting by the manual mode.
JSDIA0826GB

• TCM selects “BLIPPING CONTROL” or “NORMAL SHIFT CONTROL” according to the gear position, the
selector lever position, the engine torque and the speed when accelerating by pedal depression.
• Engine speed control demand signal is transmitted from TCM to ECM under “BLIPPING CONTROL”.
• ECM synchronizes the engine speed according to the engine speed control demand signal.
Downshifting by accelerator pedal depression
JSDIA0815GB
Downshifting by the manual mode
JSDIA0817GB

TM
JSDIA0787ZZ
M
A. Center console B. A/T assembly C. Accelerator pedal O
NOTE:
• The following components are included in A/T shift selector assembly. P
- TCM

Name Function
TCM

A
SHIFT PATTERN
SHIFT PATTERN : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005151371
B
TM
I
JSDIA1364GB
SHIFT PATTERN : System Description INFOID:0000000005151372 J

K
• High and low reverse
Output speed sensor Vehicle speed clutch solenoid valve L
valve
Engine speed signal* • Input clutch solenoid valve
M
ECM Shift pattern control
Closed throttle position signal* • Front brake solenoid valve
• Torque converter clutch so- N
lenoid valve
(engine torque)*
• Line pressure solenoid
ABS actuator and electric unit valve
Side G sensor signal*
(control unit) • Anti-interlock solenoid O
valve
BCM Stop lamp switch signal*
P
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ASC (Adaptive Shift Control)
It automatically selects the shift pattern (such as road environment and driving style) suitable for the various
situations so as to allow the vehicle to be driven efficiently and smoothly.
For example.....
• When driving on an up/down slope

ASC judges up/down slope according to engine torque data transmitted from the ECM and vehicle speed.
Fixing at 4GR, 5GR or 6GR on an up-slope prevents shift hunting and controls the vehicle to gain optimum
driving force. On a down-slope, automatic shift-down to 4GR, 5GR or 6GR controls to gain optimum engine
brake.
• When driving on a curve
TCM receives the side G sensor signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). It locks to 4GR,
5GR or 6GR position in moderate cornering or to 3GR position in sharp cornering based on this signal. This
prevents any upshift and kickdown during cornering, maintaining smooth vehicle travel.
JSDIA1362GB
DS Mode
• Changes to the shift schedule that mainly utilizes the high engine speed zone when ASC is active.
• DS mode can be switched according to the following method.
- When the selector lever is in the “D” position, shifting the selector lever to manual shift gate enables switch-
ing to DS mode.
- When in DS mode, shifting the selector lever to the main gate enables to cancel DS mode.
- After switching to manual mode with paddle shifter, switching to DS mode can not be enabled even when the
selector lever is shifted to the manual gate. (With paddle shifter)

SHIFT PATTERN : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005151381
TM
JSDIA0787ZZ
M
NOTE:
- TCM

SHIFT PATTERN : Component Description INFOID:0000000005151374
Name Function
TCM
MANUAL MODE

MANUAL MODE : System Diagram INFOID:0000000005151375
TM
JSDIA1361GB
I
MANUAL MODE : System Description INFOID:0000000005151376
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART J

Output speed sensor Vehicle speed K
A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature • High and low reverse clutch
Engine speed signal* solenoid valve
ECM • Direct clutch solenoid valve L
Accelerator pedal position signal* • Input clutch solenoid valve
Manual mode signal* • Low brake solenoid valve
Shift pattern control • 2346 brake solenoid valve
Not manual mode signal* • Front brake solenoid valve M
Manual mode shift up signal* • Torque converter clutch sole-
Combination meter noid valve
Manual mode shift down signal* • Line pressure solenoid valve
Paddle shifter shift up signal* • Anti-interlock solenoid valve N
Paddle shifter shift down signal*
O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Manual Mode
P
• The TCM receives the manual mode signal, not manual mode signal, manual mode shift up signal, manual
mode shift down signal, paddle shifter shift up signal and paddle shifter shift down signal from combination
meter via CAN communication line. The TCM shifts shift pattern control to the manual mode based on these
signals, and then shifts the A/T by operating each solenoid valve according to the shift operation of the
driver.
• The TCM prohibits the manual mode while being in fail-safe mode due to an A/T malfunction, etc. Refer to
TM-349, "Fail-Safe".

MANUAL MODE : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000005151382
JSDIA0787ZZ
NOTE:
- TCM

MANUAL MODE : Component Description INFOID:0000000005151378

E
Name Function F
TCM
Output speed sensor TM-89, "Description" G
H
High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve TM-130, "Description" I
J
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TM-106, "Description" K
Combination meter MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : System Description"
L

LOCK-UP CONTROL
LOCK-UP CONTROL
JSDIA1350GB

A/T fluid temperature sensor ATF temperature Torque converter clutch sole-
noid valve
Lock-up control ↓
Accelerator pedal position signal* Torque converter clutch con-
ECM trol valve
Closed throttle position signal*
(Engine torque)*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to
increase power transmission efficiency.
The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve,
which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases
the torque converter clutch piston.
Lock-up operation condition table
Selector lever “D” position “M” position
Gear position 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 6 5 4 3 2
Lock-up × – – – – – × × × × × ×
Slip lock-up × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Control

Lock-up control system diagram

LOCK-UP CONTROL
PCIA0014E
TM
Lock-up released
• In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained.
in this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. E
Lock-up Applied
• In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the
torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. F
In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled.
Smooth Lock-up Control
When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque con- G
verter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the
torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock.
H
Half-clutched State
• The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the
torque converter clutch solenoid pressure.
In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into I
half-clutched states, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is
completed smoothly.
Slip Lock-up Control J
• In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the
half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed.
This raises the fuel efficiency for 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, 6GR and 7GR. K

LOCK-UP CONTROL
JSDIA0787ZZ
NOTE:
- TCM

LOCK-UP CONTROL

E
Name Function F
TCM
Output speed sensor TM-278, "Description" G
H
Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation I
Torque converter clutch control valve
transiently, lock-up smoothly.
J

SHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT MECHANISM
Cross-Sectional View INFOID:0000000004040655
JSDIA0773ZZ

4. High and low reverse clutch 5. 2nd one-way clutch 6.* 1 Rear carrier
7. Mid carrier 8. Input clutch 9.* 2 Front sun gear
13. Front brake 14. 2346 brake 15.* 4 Input shaft
16. Torque converter 17. Oil pump 18.*2 Under drive sun gear
22.*1 Mid internal gear 23. Rear sun gear 24. Rear internal gear
28. Adapter case 29. Output shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
P
JSDIA0877GB
DESCRIPTION

SHIFT MECHANISM
With the use of 4 sets of planetary gears, A/T enables 7-speed transmission for forward and 1-speed transmis-
sion for backward, depending on the combination of 3 sets of multiple-disc clutches, 4 sets of multiple-disc
brakes and 2 sets of one-way clutches.
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
JSDIA1363GB
POWER TRANSMISSION
“N” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0880GB
Since the low brake is released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. P
“P” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
JSDIA1277GB
• The same as for the “N” position, since the low brake is released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not
transmitted to the output shaft.
• The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft
mechanically.

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0866GB
• The 1st one-way clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the under drive carrier. P

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

gear rear carrier
“M1” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0867GB
NOTE:
The front brake operates only while coasting.
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverses clutch regulate counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

gear rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0868GB

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

gear rear carrier
“M2” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0869GB
• The 2nd one-way clutch and the high and low reverse clutch regulates counterclockwise rotation of the rear
sun gear.
NOTE:

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0870GB

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0871GB

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft

Rear planetary gear

Mid planetary gear

mid internal gear mid internal gear rear carrier

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0872GB
• The input clutch gets engaged and connects the mid internal gear with the rear carrier. P

SHIFT MECHANISM
Rear planetary gear
Condition — input/Output —
rear carrier input shaft rear carrier
Mid planetary gear

mid internal gear mid internal gear input shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0873GB

SHIFT MECHANISM
gear input shaft
Rear planetary gear

input shaft front carrier
Mid planetary gear

input shaft

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0874GB
• The under drive carrier is fixed by the front brake. P

• Each planetary gear enters state described below.

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

input shaft under drive internal gear
Mid planetary gear

input shaft
“R” Position

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0875GB
NOTE:
The front brake operates at the fixed speed or less.
• The rear carrier and the mid internal gear are fixed by the reverse brake.
• The mid sun gear rotates at the same speed as the rear sun gear by operation of the 2nd one-way clutch
and the high and low reverse clutch.
NOTE:
The high and low reverse clutch operates at the fixed speed or less.

SHIFT MECHANISM

Rear planetary gear

Condition Output Fixed Input
Acceleration from rear internal Same number of revolution as the
Mid planetary gear

Condition Input Output Fixed
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise revolution Counterclockwise revolution —
Number of revolutions Deceleration from mid sun gear —
rear sun gear

SHIFT MECHANISM
TM
JSDIA0787ZZ
M
NOTE:
- TCM

SHIFT MECHANISM
Name of the Part (Abbreviation) Function

Front brake (FR/B) Fastens the under drive carrier.
Input clutch (I/C) Connects the mid internal gear and the rear carrier.
Direct clutch (D/C) Connects the rear carrier and the rear sun gear.
High and low reverse clutch (HLR/C) Connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear.
Reverse brake (R/B) Fastens the rear carrier.
Low brake (L/B) Fastens the mid sun gear.
2346 brake (2346/B) Fastens the under drive sun gear.
Allows the under drive carrier to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse
1st one-way clutch (1st OWC)
rotation.
Allows the rear sun gear to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse ro-
2nd one-way clutch (2nd OWC)
tation.
Torque converter Amplifies driving force the engine, and transmits it to transmission input shaft.
Driven by the engine, oil pump supplies oil to torque converter, control valve assembly, and
Oil pump
each lubricating system.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
The selector lever cannot be shifted from the “P” position unless the brake pedal is depressed while the igni- B
tion switch is ON.
The shift lock is unlocked by the shift lock unit that is activated when the ignition switch is ON and the stop
lamp switch is turned ON (brake pedal is depressed).
Therefore, the shift lock unit receives no ON signal and the shift lock remains locked if the above conditions C
are not fulfilled. (However, a shift operation is allowed if the shift lock release button is pressed.)
SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT “P” POSITION
TM
When Brake Pedal Is Not Depressed (No Shift Operation Allowed)
The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is not energized if
the brake pedal is not depressed while the ignition switch is ON. E
The lock plate (B) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (C) when the selector button (D) is pressed, and
presses only slider B (E) into the shift lock unit. Slider A (F) located
below the lock plate prevents the downward movement of the lock F
plate with the spring force. The selector lever cannot be shifted from
the “P” position for this reason.
However, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit, allowing G
the selector lever to shift if the shift lock release button is pressed.
JSDIA0119ZZ
When Brake Pedal Is Depressed (Shift Operation Allowed) H

The shift lock solenoid (A) inside the shift lock unit is energized and
the relative positions of sliders A (B) and B (C) are maintained when
the brake pedal is depressed while the ignition switch is ON. I
The lock plate (D) lowers according to the downward movement of
the position pin (E), thrusting away sliders A and B, when the selec-
tor button (F) is pressed.
The position pin lowers to the position that allows shift operation for J
this reason. As a result, the selector lever can be shifted out of the P
position.
K
JSDIA0120ZZ
OPERATION AT OTHER THAN “P” POSITION

L
The shift lock function will not operate at any position other than “P”
because the lock plate (A) is only set for the “P” position. Accord-
ingly, the selector lever can be shifted to any position regardless of
the brake operation. M
The position pin (B) enters the “P” position thrusting away the lock
plate when the selector lever is shifted to the “P” position. Then, the
shift mechanism is locked when the selector button (C) is released. N
O
JSDIA0121ZZ
“P” POSITION RETAINING MECHANISM (IGNITION SWITCH LOCK)

When ignition switch is not in the ON position, power is not applied to the shift lock solenoid in the shift lock P
unit. This causes shift lock state, and then “P” position is retained.
When an actuating system in the shift lock unit has a malfunction, selector lever is unable to operate from the
“P” position even when pressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON. However, when pressing the shift
lock release button, slider A is forcibly pressed into the shift lock unit. This allows shift lock to be released and
selector lever enables the select operation from the “P” position.
CAUTION:
Never use the shift lock release button except when the select lever is inoperative even when pressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch ON.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JSDIA0915ZZ
1. Position pin 2. Shift lock unit 3. Shift lock solenoid

4. Slider A 5. A/T shift selector connector 6. Lock plate
7. Slider B 8. Shift lock relay 9. Stop lamp switch
10. Brake pedal 11. Shift lock cover *
A. A/T shift selector assembly B. Engine room C. Brake pedal, upper
D. Center console
*: Shift lock release button becomes operative by removing shift lock cover.
Component Function
Shift lock solenoid TM-325, "Description"
The lock plate restricts the position pin stroke by se-
Lock plate lector button operation according to the shift lock unit
Shift lock unit
A/T shift selector status.
assembly Pressing the shift lock release button cancels the
Shift lock release button
shift lock forcibly.
The position pin, linking with the selector button, re-
Position pin
stricts the selector lever movement.
Shift lock relay
Stop lamp switch

A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004040663
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. B

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. A malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the
ECM memory and in the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the TCM. A malfunction history is stored in the C
TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For details, refer to EC-
1172, "DTC Index".
OBD FUNCTION TM
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system.
One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is
sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. E
The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the
instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
F
tion to A/T system parts. For details, refer to EC-706, "Diagnosis Description".

CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION) INFOID:0000000004040664
CONSULT-III APPLICATION ITEMS
Diagnostic test mode Function

Work Support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self-Diagnostic Results Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by a diagram.
CAN Diagnostic Support
It monitors the starts of CAN communication.
Monitor
DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Items List
Refer to TM-353, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Display Items List
X: Standard, —: Not applicable, : Option
SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the
VHCL/S SE-A/T (km/h or mph) X X
TCM from the output shaft revolution.
Displays the vehicle speed signal received via
ESTM VSP SIG (km/h or mph) X —
CAN communication.
Displays the output shaft revolution calculated
OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X
from the pulse signal of revolution sensor.
Displays the input shaft revolution calculated
INPUT SPEED (rpm) X X from front sun gear revolution and front carrier
revolution.
Displays the front sun gear revolution calculated
F SUN GR REV (rpm) — —
from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 1.
Displays the front carrier gear revolution calculat-
F CARR GR REV (rpm) — —
ed from the pulse signal of input speed sensor 2.
Displays the engine speed received via CAN
ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X
communication.
Displays the revolution difference between input
TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X
speed and engine speed.
Displays the accelerator position estimated value
ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X —
Displays the throttle position received via CAN
THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X
communication.
Displays the ATF temperature of oil pan calculat-
ATF TEMP 1 (°C or °F) X X ed from the signal voltage of A/T fluid tempera-
ture sensor.

A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Displays the ATF temperature estimated value of
ATF TEMP 2 (°C or °F) X X torque converter outlet calculated from the signal
voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor.
C
Displays the signal voltage of A/T fluid tempera-
ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) — —
ture sensor.
BATTERY VOLT (V) X — Displays the power supply voltage of TCM. TM
LINE PRES SOL (A) — X
line pressure solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to the E
TCC SOLENOID (A) — X
torque converter clutch solenoid.
L/B SOLENOID (A) — X
low brake solenoid. F
FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X
front brake solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to the G
HLR/C SOL (A) — X
high and low reverse clutch solenoid.
I/C SOLENOID (A) — X
input clutch solenoid. H
D/C SOLENOID (A) — X
direct clutch solenoid.
Displays the command current from TCM to the I
2346/B SOL (A) — X
2346 brake solenoid.
L/P SOL MON (A) — — line pressure solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
J

TCC SOL MON (A) — — torque converter clutch solenoid, and displays
the monitor value. K
L/B SOL MON (A) — — low brake solenoid, and displays the monitor val-
ue. L
FR/B SOL MON (A) — — front brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
M
HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — high and low reverse clutch solenoid, and dis-
plays the monitor value.
N
I/C SOL MON (A) — — input clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the O
D/C SOL MON (A) — — direct clutch solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Monitors the command current from TCM to the P
2346/B SOL MON (A) — — 2346 brake solenoid, and displays the monitor
value.
Displays the gear ratio calculated from input rev-
GEAR RATIO — X
olution and output revolution.
ENGINE TORQUE (Nm) — —

SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
ENG TORQUE D (Nm) — — flected the requested torque of each control unit
INPUT TRQ S (Nm) — —
INPUT TRQ L/P (Nm) — —
sure calculation process of line pressure control.
TRGT PRES L/P (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
oil pressure calculation process of lock-up con-
trol.
TRGT PRES TCC (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
oil pressure calculation process of shift change
control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of low
TRGT PRES L/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of front
TRGT PRE FR/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of high and
low reverse clutch solenoid valve calculated by
TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — —
the oil pressure calculation process of shift
change control.
Displays the target oil pressure value of input
TRGT PRES I/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of direct
TRGT PRES D/C (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — clutch solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the target oil pressure value of 2346
TRG PRE 2346/B (kPa, kg/cm2 or psi) — — brake solenoid valve calculated by the oil pres-
Displays the gear change data using the shift pat-
SHIFT PATTERN — —
tern control.
Displays the vehicle speed for control using the
VEHICLE SPEED (km/h or mph) — —
control of TCM.
range switch 4.
range switch 3.
range switch 2.
range switch 1.
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter
SFT DWN ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).
Displays the operation status of paddle shifter (up
SFT UP ST SW (ON/OFF) X —
switch).
Displays the operation status of selector lever
DOWN SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
(down switch).

A
SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM B
Displays the operation status of selector lever (up
UP SW LEVER (ON/OFF) X —
switch).
Displays whether the selector lever is in any po- C
NON M-MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
sition other than manual shift gate position.
Displays whether the selector lever is in the man-
MANU MODE SW (ON/OFF) X —
ual shift gate position. TM
DS RANGE (ON/OFF) — — Displays whether it is the DS mode.
• Displays the reception status of 1 position

switch signal received via CAN communica- E
1 POSITION SW (ON/OFF) X —
tion.
• Displays the reception status of overdrive con- F
trol switch signal received via CAN communi-
OD CONT SW (ON/OFF) X —
cation.
Displays the reception status of stop lamp switch G
BRAKESW (ON/OFF) X —
• Displays the reception status of POWER mode
POWERSHIFT SW (ON/OFF) X — signal received via CAN communication. H
Displays the reception status of ASCD OD cancel
ASCD-OD CUT (ON/OFF) X —
request signal received via CAN communication. I
Displays the reception status of ASCD operation
ASCD-CRUISE (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of ABS operation J
ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the reception status of TCS gear keep
TCS GR/P KEEP (ON/OFF) X —
request signal received via CAN communication. K
CAN communication is “cold”.
L
CAN communication is “warm”.
M
LOW/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of low brake.
In “Final fail-safe” mode, displays whether the N
identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
HC/IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — —
related parts of high and low reversed clutch, in-
put clutch or front brake.
O
IC/FRB PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of input clutch or front brake.
P
HLR/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of high and low reversed clutch.
Displays the kickdown condition signal status re-
W/O THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
Displays the idling status signal status received
CLSD THL POS (ON/OFF) X —
via CAN communication.

SELEC-
MAIN TION
PUT SIG-
SIGNALS FROM
NALS
ITEM
Displays the judgment results of “driving” or
DRV CST JUDGE (DRIVE/COAST) — —
“coasting” judged by TCM.
Displays the transmission value of shift position
SHIFT IND SIGNAL — —
Displays the command status from TCM to start-
STARTER RELAY (ON/OFF) — —
er relay.
Displays the transmission status of A/T CHECK
F-SAFE IND/L (ON/OFF) — — indicator lamp signal transmitted via CAN com-
munication.
• Displays the transmission status of ATF tem-
perature signal transmitted via CAN communi-
ATF WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) — —
cation.
Displays the transmission status of manual mode
MANU MODE IND (ON/OFF) — —
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
ON OFF SOL MON (ON/OFF) — — anti-interlock solenoid, and displays the monitor
status.
Monitors the command value from TCM to the
START RLY MON (ON/OFF) — —
starter relay, and displays the monitor status.
Displays the command status from TCM to anti-
ON OFF SOL (ON/OFF) — —
interlock solenoid.
SLCT LVR POSI — X Displays the shift positions recognized by TCM.
Displays the current transmission gear position

GEAR — X
recognized by TCM.
Displays the target gear position of gear change
NEXT GR POSI — — that is calculated based on the vehicle speed in-
formation and throttle information.
Displays the transmission driving mode recog-
SHIFT MODE — —
nized by TCM.
D/C PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of direct clutch.
FR/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of front brake.
2346/B PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of 2346 brake.
2346B/DC PARTS (FAIL/NOTFAIL) — — identified malfunction point judged by TCM is the
related parts of 2346 brake or direct clutch.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION

DTC Work Support

Item Description Check item
A
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input clutch solenoid
valve B
• Front brake solenoid
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not)
valve
Following items for “3GR function ratio” can be confirmed. valve C
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • High and low reverse
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) clutch solenoid valve
• Low brake solenoid
Following items for “4GR function ratio” can be confirmed. TM
valve
• 2346 brake solenoid
valve
Following items for “5GR function ratio” can be confirmed. • Anti-interlock sole-
5TH GR FNCTN P0735 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) noid valve E
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Output speed sensor
• Input speed sensor 1,
2
F
Following items for “7GR function ratio” can be confirmed. cuit
7TH GR FNCTN P1734 • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) G
• Harness or connec-
tors
• Torque converter H
Following items for “TCC solenoid function” can be confirmed. clutch solenoid valve
TCC SOL FNCTN CHECK • Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) • Torque converter
• Self-diagnostic results (OK or NG) • Input speed sensor 1,
I
2
cuit
J

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real-time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability.
Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links
with other control units during operation (not independently). In CAN communication, control units are con-
nected with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission
with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
TCM is not transmitting or re-
(CAN communication line is
U1000 CAN Communication Line ceiving CAN communication
open or shorted.)
signal for 2 seconds or more.
• TCM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”
Is “U1000” detected?
Go to LAN-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

P0615 STARTER RELAY
P0615 STARTER RELAY
A
TCM prohibits cranking other than at “P” or “N” position. B


when... TM
Set DTC if the starter monitor • Harness or connectors
value is OFF when the ignition (Starter relay and TCM circuit
P0615 Starter Relay Circuit
switch is ON at the“ P” and “N” is open or shorted.)
E
positions. • Starter relay circuit

1.PRECONDITIONING F
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION H
With CONSULT-III
1. Shift the selector lever to “P” and “N” positions.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more. I
YES >> Go to TM-271, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
K
1.CHECK STARTER RELAY SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON. L
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector terminal and ground.
IPDM E/R connector

Condition Voltage (Approx.) M
Connector Terminal
Ground Selector lever in “P” and

Battery voltage
“N” positions. N
E5 30
Selector lever in other
0V
positions.
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> Check starter relay circuit. Refer to STR-10, "Wiring Diagram - STARTING SYSTEM -".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 1) P
2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and IPDM E/R vehi-
cle side harness connector terminal.

P0615 STARTER RELAY
A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector IPDM E/R vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
F51 9 E5 30 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY AND IPDM E/R (PART 2)
Check the continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity
F51 9 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-384, "Exploded View".

A
The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and transmits a signal to the TCM. B

when... TM
(Transmission range switch-
Transmission range switch sig-
Transmission Rnage Sensor A es 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit
P0705 nals input with impossible pat- E
Circuit (PRNDL Input) is open or shorted.)
tern.
• Transmission range switches
1, 2, 3 and 4
F
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and G
H
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III I
2. Select “ACCELE POSI” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Shift the selector lever throughout the entire shift position from “P” to “D”. (Hold the selector lever at each J
position for 2 seconds or more)
ACCELE POSI : More than 1.0/8 K

L
With GST
M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004040673 N

Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". O
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. P

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and transmits a signal to the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Trouble diagnosis name Diagnostic item is detected when... Possible cause
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is −40
(Sensor circuit is open.)
°C (−40 °F) or less for 5 seconds while driving the vehi-
• A/T fluid temperature
cle at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
sensor
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is 180 (Sensor circuit is short.)
°C (356 °F) or more for 5 seconds. • A/T fluid temperature
sensor
Set DTC when the A/T fluid temperature sensor is in the
following conditions while driving the vehicle at the vehi-
cle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
Transmission Fluid Tempera-
P0710 : 15 °C – 20 °C (59 °F – 68 °F)
ture Sensor A Circuit
: 10 °C – 15 °C (50 °F – 59 °F)
For 4 minutes
: 5 °C – 10 °C (41 °F – 50 °F) • Harness or connectors
(Sensor circuit is stuck.)
: 0 °C – 5 °C (32 °F – 41 °F) • A/T fluid temperature
: −5 °C – 0 °C (23 °F – 32 °F) sensor
: −10 °C – −5 °C (14 °F – 23 °F)

For 7 minutes
: −15 °C – −10 °C (5 °F – 14 °F)
: −20 °C – −15 °C (−4 °F – 5 °F)
For 14 minutes : −40 °C – −20 °C (−40 °F – −4 °F)

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 14 minutes or more.
SLCT LVR POSI :D

With GST

A
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT B

YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-384, "Exploded View". C
TM

The input speed sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the A/
T. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
Set DTC when the revolution of
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor A (Sensor circuit is open.)
P0717 input speed sensor 1 and/or 2 is
Circuit No Signal • Input speed sensor 1 and/or
270 rpm or less.
2

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “GEAR”, “VHCL/S SE-A/T”, “W/O THL POS” and “ENGINE SPEED” with “Data
Monitor”.
CAUTION:
Keep the same gear position.
NOTE:
test.
SLCT LVR POSI :D

GEAR : 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th
VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
CLSD THL POS : OFF
ENGINE SPEED : More than 1,500 rpm
With GST


NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. A
TM

The Output speed sensor detects the revolution of the parking gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is transmitted to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
• Set DTC when the output
MPH) or less even if the vehi-
cle speed signal recognizes
nition switch is turned ON.)
recognized by the output
speed sensor decelerates 36
ing 60 msec when the output
speed sensor recognizes that • Harness or connectors
P0720 Output Speed Sensor Circuit the vehicle speed is 36 km/h (Sensor circuit is open.)
(23 MPH) or more and the ve- • Output speed sensor
hicle speed signal recognizes
of output speed sensor decel-
more even if the vehicle
speed of vehicle speed signal
60 msec when the output
(23 MPH) or more.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “ESTM VSP SIG” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”

ESTM VSP SIG : 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more A

With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III”. B
NO >> INSPECTION END C
1.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TM

Is the inspection result normal? E
F

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
P0725 ENGINE SPEED
The engine speed signal is transmitted from the ECM to the TCM with CAN communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
• TCM does not receive the
CAN communication signal
from the ECM. Harness or connectors
P0725 Engine Speed Input Circuit • Set DTC when the engine (ECM to TCM circuit is open or
speed is more less 150 rpm shorted.)
even if the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (7 MPH).

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
SLCT LVR POSI :D

VHCL/S SE-A/T : More than 10km/h (7 MPH)
With GST
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-719, "CONSULT-III Function".
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III

P0725 ENGINE SPEED
YES >> GO TO 3. A
NO >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to TM-264, "CONSULT-III Function (TRANSMISSION)".
B
YES >> Replace A/T assembly. Refer to TM-384, "Exploded View". C
TM

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
solenoid valve
• 0.815 or less

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 6th A
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

2. Check DTC. F
detected?
G
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
1. Stop vehicle.
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
M

• TCM detects a high-rpm state of the under drive sun gear.

• The number of revolutions of the under drive sun gear is calculated with the input speed sensor 1 and 2.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
Set DTC when the revolution of • 2346 brake solenoid valve
P0730 Incorrect Gear Ratio under drive sun gear is 8,000 • Front brake solenoid valve
rpm or more. • Input speed sensor 1, 2

CAUTION:
DURE”.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”.
3. Drive vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the
table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
ENGINE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.

VEHICLE SPEED Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
B/FUEL SCHDL Same value as the Freeze Frame Data.
With GST


A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 4.610 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 1st
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 1st
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 2.991 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 2nd
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 2nd
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 1.912 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC & SRT confirmation”.

GEAR : 3rd
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 3rd
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Drive vehicle in “D” position allowing it to shift from 1GR to 7GR gear and check shift timing and shift
shock.
>> INSPECTION END



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 1.332 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 4th
CAUTION:
When “TESTING” is not detect on CONSULT-III for a long time, check “Self Diagnostic Results” in
“TRANSMISSION”. When a DTC other than “P0734” is detected, check the DTC. Refer to TM-353,
"DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 4th
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 0.943 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 5th
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 5th
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



A
• The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, M2, M3, M4, B
M5, M6 and M7 by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the vehicle speed sensor and accelera-
tor pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be con-
trolled.
• Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. C
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1.0/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not
change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
when...
A DTC is set if the torque con- F
verter clutch solenoid valve
Torque Converter Clutch Cir- monitor value is 0.4 A or less
P0740 open or shorted.)
cuit/Open when the torque converter
• Torque converter clutch sole- G
noid valve
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC DETECTION K
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VEHICLE SPEED” with “Data Monitor”. L
NOTE:
test. M
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd N
With GST O
YES >> Go to TM-295, "Diagnosis Procedure". P



A
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused B
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve
sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Harness or connectors E
Set DTC when the lock-up is
Torque Converter Clutch Circuit noid valve
P0744 not performed in spite of within
Intermittent • Torque converter
the lock-up area.
• Input speed sensor 1, 2 F

CAUTION: G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
I
>> GO TO 2.
J
With CONSULT-III
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 10 seconds or more. K
NOTE:
test. L
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
M
With GST N
YES >> Go to TM-297, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the line pressure
P0745 Pressure Control Solenoid A 0.4 A or less when the line pres-
open or shorted.)
sure solenoid valve command
• Line pressure solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Wait for 5 seconds or more at idle speed in “N” position.
With GST


A
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve prevents the simultaneous activation of the input clutch and the low brake. B
• The anti-interlock solenoid valve is an ON/OFF type solenoid valve.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
• A DTC is set if the anti-inter-
lock solenoid valve monitor E
value is ON when the anti-in-
terlock solenoid valve com- • Harness or connectors
mand value is OFF. (Solenoid valve circuit is
P0750 Shift Solenoid A
• A DTC is set if the anti-inter- open or shorted.) F
lock solenoid valve monitor • Anti-interlock solenoid valve
value is OFF when the anti-
interlock solenoid valve com-
mand value is ON. G

CAUTION: H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and I
>> GO TO 2. J
With CONSULT-III K
L
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st M
N
With GST
O
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004040718 P


• The Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
• The Input clutch solenoid valve controls the input clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the input clutch
P0775 Pressure Control Solenoid B 0.4 A or less when the input
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST


P0780 SHIFT
P0780 SHIFT
A
The TCM detects the malfunction of low brake solenoid valve. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction B
(circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Shifting from 3rg to 4th with E
the selector level in “D” posi-
tion, the gear ratio does not
shift to 1.412 (gear ratio of
P0780 Shift Error • Low brake solenoid valve
4th).
F
• Shifting from 5th to 6th or 6th
to 7th, the engine speed ex-
ceeds the prescribed speed.
G
CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
J
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI”, “ACCELE POSI” and “GEAR” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions.
L
SLCT LVR POSI :D
GEAR : 3rd → 4th
M
With GST


• The front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
• The front brake solenoid valve controls the front brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the front brake
P0795 Pressure Control Solenoid C 0.4 A or less when the front
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 7th
With GST


P1705 TP SENSOR
P1705 TP SENSOR
A
• The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. B
• The accelerator pedal position sensor detects the accelerator position.
• The accelerator pedal position sensor transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit
the voltage signal to the ECM.
• The TCM receives accelerator pedal position signal from the ECM via CAN communication. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
TCM detects the difference be-
Harness or connectors
Accelerator Pedal Position Sen- tween two accelerator pedal po-
P1705 (Sensor circuit is open or short- F
sor Signal sition signals received from
ed.)
ECM via CAN communication.

G
1.PRECONDITIONING
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
With CONSULT-III
1. Start the engine. J
SLCT LVR POSI :D

K
1.CHECK DTC OF ECM N
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ENGINE”. O
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to EC-1172, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK DTC OF TCM

With CONSULT-III

P1705 TP SENSOR
NO >> GO TO 3.

A
The vehicle speed signal is transmitted from unified meter and A/C amp. to TCM by CAN communication line. B
The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the output speed sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will
then use the vehicle speed signal.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
• Set DTC when the vehicle E
speed signal recognizes that
MPH) or less even if the out-
put speed sensor recognizes F
nition switch is turned ON.) G
recognized by the vehicle
speed signal decelerates 36
H
ing 60 msec when the vehicle
speed signal recognizes that Harness or connectors
P1721 Vehicle Speed Signal the vehicle speed is 36 km/h (Sensor circuit is open or short-
I
(23 MPH) or more and the ed.)
output speed sensor recog-
nizes that the vehicle speed
is 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more. J
of vehicle speed signal decel-
more even if the vehicle K
speed of output speed sensor
60 msec when the vehicle L
(23 MPH) or more.
M
CAUTION:
• Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. N
1.PRECONDITIONING
O
P
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Shift the selector lever to manual shift gate side.
3. Start up in M1, and then upshift to M2.
4. Accelerate to approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) in M2.

1.CHECK DTC OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT).

With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ABS”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to BRC-121, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC OF UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “METER/M&A”.
YES >> Check DTC detected item. Refer to MWI-112, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DTC OF TCM
With CONSULT-III
NO >> GO TO 4.

P1730 INTERLOCK
P1730 INTERLOCK
A
Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. B


when... TM
(Solenoid valve circuit is open
or shorted.)
E
Set DTC when the output
speed sensor detects the de-
P1730 Interlock solenoid valve F
celeration of 12 km/h (7 MPH)
or more for 1 second.
• Anti-interlock solenoid valve G
NOTE: H
When the vehicle is driven fixed in second gear, a input speed sensor malfunction is displayed, but
this is not a input speed sensor malfunction.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
CAUTION:
DURE”. J
K
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “GEAR” with “Data Monitor”. N
3. Drive vehicle the following condition.
SLCT LVR POSI :D O

GEAR : 1st through 7th
With GST P

P1730 INTERLOCK
Judgment of A/T Interlock INFOID:0000000004040739
Refer to TM-349, "Fail-Safe".



A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

TM
when...
solenoid valve
• 0.731 or less
H
CAUTION:
DURE”.
J
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. L
With CONSULT-III M
N
ATF TEMP 1 : 20°C (68°F) – 140°C (284°F)
With GST
O
P
YES >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III

GEAR : 7th
CAUTION:
353, "DTC Index".
With GST

Gear position : 7th
2. Check DTC.
detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
1. Stop vehicle.
>> INSPECTION END



P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
A
• The manual mode switch, manual mode shift-up switch and manual mode shift-down switch are installed in B
the A/T shift selector assembly. It transmits manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to
unified meter and A/C amp. Then unified meter and A/C amp. transmits signals to TCM via CAN communi-
cation.
• Manual mode switch transmits manual mode switch signal or not manual mode switch signal to unified meter C
and A/C amp. Then TCM receives signals from unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The manual mode shift-up switch transmits manual mode shift up signal to the unified meter and A/C amp.
Then TCM receives signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. TM
• The manual mode shift-down switch transmits manual mode shift down signal to the unified meter and A/C
amp. Then TCM receives signal from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication.
• The paddle shifter transmits shift up and shift down switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. Then TCM
receives signals from the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication. E
• The TCM transmits manual mode indicator signal to the unified meter and A/C amp. via CAN communication
line.
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

G
when...
H
• TCM monitors manual mode,
non manual mode, up or
(These switches circuit is
down switch signal, and de-
open or shorted.)
tects as irregular when im- I
• Manual mode select switch
P1815 Manual Mode Switch Circuit possible input pattern occurs
(Into A/T shift selector)
2 second or more.
• Manual mode position select
• When shift up/down signal of
switch (Into A/T shift selector)
paddle shifter continuously
• Paddle shifter
J
remains ON for 60 seconds.

K
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. N
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” and “MANU MODE SW” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Maintain the following each conditions more than 60 seconds.
SLCT LVR POSI :D O

MANU MODE SW : ON
P

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”, “SFT UP ST
SW” and “SFT DWN ST SW” with “Data Monitor”.
3. Check the ON/OFF operations of each monitor item.
Item Monitor Item Condition Status

MANU MODE SW
NON M-MODE SW
Manual mode switch
UP SW LEVER
DOWN SW LEVER
Paddle shifter: UP (+ side) ON
SFT UP ST SW
Paddle shifter
Paddle shifter: DOWN (− side) ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Without CONSULT-III
Drive the vehicle in the manual mode, and then check that the indication of the shift position indicator matches
with the actual gear position.
1. Shift the selector lever to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
2. Shift the selector lever to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
3. Shift the paddle shifter to UP side, and then accelerate from 1GR to 7GR.
4. Shift the paddle shifter to DOWN side, and then decelerate from 7GR to 1GR.
Manual mode switch>>GO TO 2.
Paddle shifter>>GO TO 9.

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1
2
M137 4 Battery voltage
3
5
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 5.
Check manual mode switch. Refer to TM-316, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 4.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
4.CHECK MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A

• Check terminals of A/T shift selector harness connector and harness cladding for damage.
B
YES >> GO TO 17.
C
TM
Continuity
M137 4 Existed
E

YES >> GO TO 6. F
Check voltage between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. G

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal H
1
Ground
2
M137 Battery voltage I
3
5
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (STEP 1) K

L
3. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter
and A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals.
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness M

1 10 N
2 25
M137 M66 Existed
3 5
O
5 11
YES >> GO TO 8. P
8.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T SHIFT SELECTOR AND UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP. (STEP 2)
Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH

Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
Ground
2
M137 Not existed
3
5
YES >> GO TO 16.
9.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors.
4. Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M38 3 1
Battery voltage
M39 3 1
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 12.
Check paddle shifter. Refer to TM-316, "Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)]", TM-316, "Compo-
nent Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)]".
YES >> GO TO 11.
• Check terminals of paddle shifter connector for damage.
YES >> GO TO 17.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
M38 1
Existed
M39 1
YES >> GO TO 13.
Check voltage between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector A

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ground
M38 3
Battery voltage B
M39 3
YES >> GO TO 16. C
NO >> GO TO 14.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. TM
3. Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and unified meter and
A/C amp. vehicle side harness connector terminals. E
Unified meter and A/C amp. vehicle side harness

F
M38 3 6
M66 Existed
M39 3 26 G
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H
Check continuity between paddle shifter vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground. I

Continuity
Connector Terminal J
Ground
M38 3
Not existed
M39 3
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 16.
L
• Check terminals of unified meter and A/C amp. connector for damage. M
YES >> GO TO 17. N
17.CHECK UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.
1. Reconnect all the connectors. O
3. Select “M RANGE SW”, “NM RANGE SW”, “AT SFT UP SW”, “AT SFT DWN SW”, “ST SFT UP SW” and
“ST SFT DWN SW” on “Data Monitor” mode for “METER/M&A”, and check the On/Off operations of each P
monitor item. Refer to MWI-93, "Reference Value".
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Replace unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-175, "Exploded View".

P1815 M-MODE SWITCH
Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch) INFOID:0000000004040747

Check continuity between A/T shift selector connector terminals.
A/T shift selector harness connector

Connector Terminal
Selector lever: Manual (Neutral) Existed
1
Selector lever: DOWN (− side) Existed
2
M137 4
Selector lever: UP (+ side) Existed
3
Selector lever: “D” position (Auto) Existed
5
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-up)] INFOID:0000000005151401

Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-up) connector terminals.
Paddle shifter (shift-up) connector

Connector Terminal
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is
Existed
M38 1 3 pulled.
NO >> Replace damaged parts. Refer to TM-375, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection [Paddle Shifter (Shift-down)] INFOID:0000000005151402
1.CHECK PADDLE SHIFTER (SHIFT-DOWN)

Check continuity between paddle shifter (shift-down) connector terminals.
Paddle shifter (shift-down) connector

Connector Terminal
Paddle shifter (shift-down)
Existed
M39 1 3 is pulled.
NO >> Replace paddle shifter (shift-down). Refer to TM-375, "Exploded View".

A
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted B
from the transmission range switch, output speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor. Gears will
then be shifted to the optimum position.
• The high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve controls the high and low reverse clutch control valve in
response to a signal transmitted from the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the high and low
reverse clutch solenoid valve
monitor value is 0.4 A or less
P2713 Pressure Control Solenoid D open or shorted.)
when the high and low reverse
solenoid valve
G
CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
I
>> GO TO 2. J
With CONSULT-III
3. Drive the vehicle and maintain the following conditions for 5 seconds or more.
L
MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 3rd M
With GST N
YES >> Go to TM-317, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P

• The low brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the transmis-
• The low brake solenoid valve controls the low brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the low brake so-
lenoid valve monitor value is 0.4
P2722 Pressure Control Solenoid E A or less when the low brake
open or shorted.)
solenoid valve command value
is more than 0.75 A.

CAUTION:
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST


A
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans- B
• The 2346 brake solenoid valve controls the 2346 brake control valve in response to a signal transmitted from
the TCM. C
TM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the 2346 brake
P2731 Pressure Control Solenoid F 0.4 A or less when the 2346
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT”, “MANU MODE SW”, “GEAR” and “VHCL/S SE-A/T” with “Data Monitor”. K
BATTERY VOLT : 9 V or more L

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 2nd
VHCL/S SE-A/T : 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more M
With GST
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-35, "Intermittent Incident". O
P

• The direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals transmitted from the trans-
• The direct clutch solenoid valve controls the direct clutch control valve in response to a signal transmitted
from the TCM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

when...
A DTC is set if the direct clutch
P2807 Pressure Control Solenoid G 0.4 A or less when the direct
open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch
OFF. Then wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

MANU MODE SW : ON
GEAR : 1st
With GST


A
TM

Supply power to TCM.

1.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

2. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
4. Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals.

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
5
1
10
5
10
5
6
10
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
5
F51 Existed
10
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
Check voltage between A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector terminals and ground.

Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Ground
6
YES >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly vehicle side harness connector
terminal 2.
• Harness for short or open between push-button ignition switch and A/T assembly vehicle side
harness connector terminals 1 and 6.
• 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fuse, fusible link and relay box)

• 10A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R)
• Push-button ignition switch. Refer to PG-61, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -". A
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
B
• Check terminals of A/T assembly connector for damage.
C
TM

TCM transmit the switch signals to unified meter and A/C amp. by CAN communication line. Then manual
mode switch position is indicated on the shift position indicator.
1.CHECK A/T INDICATOR

2. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the shift position indi-
cator mutually coincide.
position indicator mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (− side)”
side (1GR ⇔ 7GR).
1.CHECK INPUT SIGNALS

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SLCT LVR POSI” in “Data Monitor” in “TRANSMISSION”.
3. Check the actual selector lever position (“P”, “R”, “N” and “D”) and the indication of the “SLCT LVR POSI”
mutually coincide. Refer to TM-151, "Reference Value".
“SLCT LVR POSI” mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “UP (+ side)” or “DOWN (−
side)” side (1GR ⇔ 7GR). Refer to TM-151, "Reference Value".
NO-1 [The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear
shifting in the manual mode possible). Or the shift position indicator is not indicated.]>>•Check manual
mode switch. Refer to TM-316, "Component Inspection (Manual Mode Switch)".
• Check A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated).
- Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-264, "CONSULT-III
Function (TRANSMISSION)".
NO-2 (The actual gear position changes, but the shift position indicator is not indicated.)>>•Perform “Self
Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-264, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)".
NO-3 (The actual gear position and the indication on the shift position indicator do not coincide.)>>•Perform
“Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “TRANSMISSION”. Refer to TM-264, "CONSULT-III Function
(TRANSMISSION)".
NO-4 (Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the shift position indicator.)>>•Check the
unified meter and A/C amp. Refer to MWI-4, "Work flow".

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A
Shift lock system circuit consists of the following part. B
Component Function
Activated by the push-button ignition switch and stop lamp signals, it holds the relative positions of C
Shift lock solenoid
sliders A and B.
Current flow to stop lamp switch allows shift lock relay contact ON, and then power is applied to shift
Shift lock relay
lock solenoid.
TM
Stop lamp switch Depressing the brake pedal turns ON the stop lamp switch and energizes the shift lock relay.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram - A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004040767
JCDWM0313GB

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
TM
JCDWM0314GB

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
JCDWM0315GB

3. Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal released.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
NO >> GO TO 2. A
Attempt to shift the selector lever to any other position with the brake pedal depressed.
B
C
1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION TM

Check the selector lever position for damage. Refer to TM-370, "Inspection and Adjustment".
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to TM-370, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2.CHECK POWER SOURCE F
2. Disconnect shift lock relay.
3. Check voltage between shift lock relay harness connector terminal and ground. G
Shift lock relay harness connector
Connector Terminal H
Ground
Depressed brake pedal. Battery voltage
E52 2
Released brake pedal. 0V
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO-1 >> When pressing the brake pedal, the voltage is 0 V: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> When releasing the brake pedal, the voltage is battery voltage: GO TO 5. J
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. K
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.
Stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector

Voltage (Approx.) L
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 4.
• 10 A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)] N
terminal 8F and stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector terminal 3.
• Harness for short to ground or open between battery and fuse block (J/B).
• Harness for short to ground between battery and ICC brake hold relay vehicle side harness con- O
nector terminal 7. [With ICC (Full Speed Range) System]
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH P
• Harness for short to ground or open between stop lamp switch vehicle side harness connector
terminal 4 and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 2.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
• Harness for short to ground between ICC brake hold relay vehicle side harness connector termi-
nal 6 and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 2. [With ICC (Full Speed
Range) System]
YES-1 >> Without ICC (Full Speed Range) System: Repair or replace harness between stop lamp switch
and shift lock relay.
YES-2 >> With ICC (Full Speed Range) System: GO TO 6.
6.CHECK DTC WITH ICC (FULL SPEED RANGE) SYSTEM
With CONSULT-III
Perform “Self Diagnostic Results” mode for “ICC”.
Is any malfunction detected?
YES >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to CCS-158, "DTC Index".
NO >> Repair or replace harness between stop lamp switch and shift lock relay.
Check continuity between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Continuity
E52 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
Check shift lock relay. Refer to TM-331, "Component Inspection (Shift lock relay)".
YES >> GO TO 9.
2. Check voltage between shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal and ground.

Voltage (Approx.)
YES >> GO TO 10.
• Harness for short to ground or open between push-button ignition switch and fuse block (J/B).
terminal 4F and shift lock relay vehicle side harness connector terminal 5.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector A

Continuity
M137 4 Existed
B
YES >> GO TO 11.
C
Check shift lock solenoid. Refer to TM-331, "Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid)".
• Harness for short to ground, short to power or open between shift lock relay vehicle side har-
ness connector terminal 3 and A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal 8. E
• Harness for short to ground, short to power or open between A/T shift selector harness conduc-
tor terminal 8 and shift lock unit harness connector terminal 3.
• Harness for open between A/T shift selector harness conductor terminal 4 and shift lock unit
F
harness connector terminal 4.
Component Inspection (Shift lock solenoid) INFOID:0000000005151529
G

1. Remove shift lock unit. Refer to TM-371, "Exploded View". H
2. Apply voltage to terminals 3 and 4 of shift lock unit connector, and then check that shift lock solenoid is
activated.
CAUTION:
I
(+) (fuse) (−)

J
Shift lock unit connector Condition Status
Apply 12 V direct K
Shift lock solenoid
M222 3 M222 4 current between ter-
operates
minals 3 and 4.
Can the lock plate be moved up and down? L
NO >> Replace shift lock unit. Refer to TM-371, "Exploded View".
Component Inspection (Shift lock relay) INFOID:0000000004040771 M

Check continuity between shift lock relay terminals. N
CAUTION:
O
Shift lock relay connector
Connector Terminal
Apply 12 V direct current P
Existed
E52 3 5 between terminals 1 and 2.
OFF Not existed
NO >> Replace shift lock relay.

SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Component Inspection (Stop lamp switch) INFOID:0000000004040772

Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector terminals.
Stop lamp switch connector

Connector Terminal
Depressed brake pedal. Existed
E110 3 4
Released brake pedal. Not existed
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-18, "Exploded View".

A
Indicates selector lever position. B

1.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR (PART 1) C

2. Check that each position indicator lamp of the selector lever position indicator turns on when shifting the
selector lever from “P” to “M” position. TM
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to TM-333, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
Check that the night illumination of the selector lever position indicator turns on when setting the lighting F
switch in 1st position.
YES >> INSPECTION END G
H
I
Position indicator lamp>> GO TO 2.
Illumination lamp>> GO TO 10.
J
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector connector. K
L
Terminal Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (−) M
M137 10 4 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6. N
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT O
P
Continuity
M137 4 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.


1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector terminal and BCM vehicle
side harness connector terminal.
A/T shift selector vehicle side harness connector BCM vehicle side harness connector
Continuity
M137 10 M122 96 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.

Continuity
M137 10 Not existed
YES >> Check BCM input/output signal. Refer to BCS-44, "Reference Value".
tor terminals.

7 Selector lever in “D” Existed
4
9 Selector lever in “M” Existed
2, 6 Selector lever in “N” Existed
3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11 and “M” position. Not existed
M137 M221
3, 6 Selector lever in “D” Existed
10
4, 6 Selector lever in “R” Existed
5, 6 Selector lever in “P” Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
TOR (PART 1)

Shift position switch harness connector Selector lever position indicator harness connector A
Continuity
2 3
3 4
B
4 5
M221 5 M223 7 Existed C
6 6
7 8
9 2 TM
YES >> GO TO 8. E
TOR (PART 2) F
tor for damage.
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR H
Check selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-336, "Component Inspection".

I
YES >> Check the following.
• Check terminals of A/T shift selector connector, shift position switch connector and selector
lever position indicator connector for damage.
• Check connector for loose connection. J
10.CHECK POWER SOURCE K
L

M
Terminal Condition Voltage (Approx.)
Connector
(+) (−)
M137 7 9 Lighting switch 1ST Battery voltage N
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Check illumination circuit. Refer to INL-85, "Wiring Diagram - ILLUMINATION -". O
P
tor terminals.


Continuity
10 Existed
7
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11 Not existed
M137 M221
11 Existed
9
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 12.
CATOR (PART 1)
Continuity
10 1
M221 M223 Existed
11 9
YES >> GO TO 13.
CATOR (PART 2)
tor for damage.
YES >> GO TO 9.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004040776

Check that selector lever position indicator lamps turn on.
CAUTION:

Selector lever position indicator connector A

Terminal Condition Status
Connector
(+) (fuse) (−)
Apply 12 V direct current be-
B
1 9 Illumination lamp turns on.
tween terminals 1 and 9.
Apply 12 V direct current be- “N” position indicator lamp
3 C
Apply 12 V direct current be- “D” position indicator lamp
4
M223 8
Apply 12 V direct current be- “R” position indicator lamp TM
5
Apply 12 V direct current be- “P” position indicator lamp
7
tween terminals 7 and 8. turns on. E
Apply 12 V direct current be- “M” mode indicator lamp
6 2
Is the inspection result normal? F
NO >> Replace the selector lever position indicator. Refer to TM-371, "Exploded View".
G

TCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

TCM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004040777
VALUES ON DIAGNOSIS TOOL

NOTE:
1. The CONSULT-III electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each
solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-III display. If the difference is
noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical
parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-III and that indicated in Service Man-
ual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
- Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance
- Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start
- Gear position displayed on CONSULT-III indicates the point where shifts are completed
3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-III changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed
upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
CONSULT-III MONITOR ITEM
VHCL/S SE-A/T During driving
ometer reading.
ESTM VSP SIG During driving
ometer reading.
OUTPUT REV During driving (lock-up ON) Tachometer/Gear ratio
Approximately matches the engine
INPUT SPEED During driving (lock-up ON)
speed.
Revolution of front sun gear is indi-
F SUN GR REV During driving
cated.
Revolution of front carrier is indi-
F CARR GR REV During driving
cated.
Closely matches the tachometer
ENGINE SPEED Engine running
reading.
TC SLIP SPEED During driving Engine speed − Input speed
ACCELE POSI
THROTTLE POSI
Temperature of ATF in the oil pan is
indicated.
Temperature of ATF at the exit of
torque converter.
ATF TEMP SE 1 0°C (32° F) – 20°C (68°F) – 80°C (176°F) 3.3 – 2.7 – 0.9 V
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON Battery voltage (11 V – 14 V)
LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A
TCC SOLENOID Lock-up is active 0.8 A
L/B SOLENOID

TCM
A
FR/B SOLENOID
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A B
HLR/C SOL
I/C SOLENOID
Input clutch engaged 0 – 0.05 A C
D/C SOLENOID
TM
2346/B SOL
L/P SOL MON During driving 0.2 – 0.6 A E
TCC SOL MON Lock-up is active 0.8 A
F
L/B SOL MON
Low brake disengaged 0 – 0.05 A G
FR/B SOL MON
H
HLR/C SOL MON
Input clutch disengaged 0.6 – 0.8 A I
I/C SOL MON
D/C SOL MON J
2346/B SOL MON
K
Driving with 3GR 2.027 L
GEAR RATIO Driving with 4GR 1.412
M
Changes the value according to N
ENGINE TORQUE During driving
ENG TORQUE D During driving
the acceleration or deceleration. O
INPUT TRQ S During driving
Changes the value according to P
INPUT TRQ L/P During driving
Selector lever in “P” and “N” positions 490 kPa
TRGT PRES L/P
Other than the above 490 – 1370 kPa
Slip lock-up is active 0 – 600 kPa
TRGT PRES TCC Lock-up is active 600 kPa
Other than the above 0 kPa

TCM
Low brake engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES L/B
Low brake disengaged 0 kPa
Front brake engaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES FR/B
Front brake disengaged 0 kPa
High and low reverse clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE HLR/C
High and low reverse clutch engaged 0 kPa
Input clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES I/C
Input clutch engaged 0 kPa
Direct clutch disengaged 1370 kPa
TRGT PRES D/C
Direct clutch engaged 0 kPa
2346 brake engaged 1370 kPa
TRG PRE 2346/B
2346 brake disengaged 0 kPa
SHIFT PATTERN During normal driving (without shift changes) FF
VEHICLE SPEED During driving
ometer reading.
RANGE SW 4
Selector lever in “P”, “R” and “N” positions ON
RANGE SW 3
Selector lever in “P” and “R” positions ON
RANGE SW 2
Selector lever in “P” position ON
RANGE SW 1
Paddle shifter (shift-down) is pulled ON
SFT DWN ST SW
Paddle shifter (shift-up) is pulled ON
SFT UP ST SW
DOWN SW LEVER
UP SW LEVER
NON M-MODE SW
MANU MODE SW
Driving with DS mode ON
DS RANGE
Selector lever in “1” position ON
1 POSITION SW
When overdrive control switch is depressed ON
OD CONT SW
When overdrive control switch is released OFF
Depressed brake pedal ON
BRAKESW
Released brake pedal OFF
Power mode ON
POWERSHIFT SW

TCM
A
When TCM receives ASCD OD cancel request signal ON
ASCD-OD CUT
ASCD operate ON B
ASCD-CRUISE
ABS operate ON
ABS SIGNAL
Other than the above OFF C
When TCM receives TCS gear keep request signal ON
TCS GR/P KEEP
TM
ON
TCS SIGNAL 2 demand signal is “cold”
Other than the above OFF E
ON
TCS SIGNAL 1 demand signal is “warm”
Other than the above OFF F
At 4 - 5 - 6 gear shift control FAIL
LOW/B PARTS
G
HC/IC/FRB PARTS
At 4 - 5 - 6 gear shift control FAIL H
IC/FRB PARTS
HLR/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL I
Fully depressed accelerator pedal ON
W/O THL POS
Released accelerator pedal OFF
J
Released accelerator pedal ON
CLSD THL POS
Fully depressed accelerator pedal OFF
Depressed accelerator pedal DRIVE K
DRV CST JUDGE
Released accelerator pedal COAST

TCM
When the selector lever is positioned in between each po-
OFF
sition
Selector lever in “P” position P
Selector lever in “N” position N
Selector lever in “D” position
D
Selector lever in “D” position: 7GR
SHIFT IND SIGNAL Selector lever in “D” position: 3GR 3

Driving with DS mode DS
STARTER RELAY
For 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON ON
F-SAFE IND/L
When TCM transmits the ATF indicator lamp signal ON
ATF WARN LAMP
Driving with manual mode ON
MANU MODE IND
ON
ON OFF SOL MON Driving with 1GR to 3GR
START RLY MON
ON
ON OFF SOL Driving with 1GR to 3GR

TCM
A
Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions N/P
Selector lever in “D” and “DS” positions B
D
Selector lever in “M” position: 7GR
SLCT LVR POSI
Selector lever in “M” position: 5GR 5 C
TM
GEAR During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th E
NEXT GR POSI During driving 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th
Driving with the D position 0 or 3
SHIFT MODE F
Driving with the manual mode 4 or 8
At 1 - 2 gear shift control FAIL
D/C PARTS
Other than the above NOTFAIL G
FR/B PARTS
H
2346/B PARTS
At 2 - 3 - 4 gear shift control FAIL I
2346B/DC PARTS
TERMINAL LAYOUT
J
SCIA1658E
M
PHYSICAL VALUES
N
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ − Signal name O
Output

(Y) Ignition switch OFF 0V P
2 Power supply
Ground Input Always Battery voltage
(R) (Memory back-up)
3 Input/
— CAN-H — —
(L) Output
4 Input/
— K-line — —
(V) Output

TCM
Terminal
Description
(Wire color)
Input/
+ − Signal name
Output
5
(B)

7 Selector lever in “R” position. 0V

Ground Back-up lamp relay Input Ignition switch ON
(R) Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage
8 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
Selector lever in “N” and “P” po-
9 Battery voltage
Ground Starter relay Output Ignition switch ON sitions.
(LG)
Selector lever in other positions. 0V
10
(B)

TCM
Wiring Diagram - A/T CONTROL SYSTEM - INFOID:0000000004040778
TM
P
JCDWM0308GB

TCM
JCDWM0309GB

TCM
TM
JCDWM0310GB

TCM
JCDWM0311GB

TCM
TM
JCDWM0312GB
P
Fail-Safe INFOID:0000000005151179
TCM has the electrical fail-safe mode. The mode is divided into a maximum of 3 phases (1st Fail-Safe, 2nd
Fail-Safe and Final Fail-Safe) and functions so that the operation can be continued even if the signal circuit of
the main electronically controlled input/output parts is damaged.
Even if the electronic circuit is normal, the fail-safe mode may start under special conditions (such as when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly from a hard wheel spin status to stop the rotation of wheels). In this case,
turn the ignition switch OFF and back to ON after 5 seconds to resume the normal shift pattern.

TCM
Consequently, the customer's vehicle may already return to the normal condition. Refer to TM-208, "Diagnosis
Flow".
The mode that the vehicle can stop safely, to prompt the driver to stop if the malfunction occurs and to shift to
1st fail-safe
2nd Fail-Safe early. It shifts to 2nd Fail-Safe or Final Fail-Safe after the vehicle stopped.
The mode that the vehicle shifts to Final Fail-Safe without changing the behavior, by identifying the malfunc-
2nd fail-safe
tioning parts in the condition that the driving force required for the driving is secured.
• Selects the shifting pattern that the malfunctioning parts identified at 1st and 2nd Fail-Safe are not used, and
Final fail-safe then secure the driving force that is required for the driving.
• The mode that the shifting performance does not decrease by normal shift control.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
Vehicle
condition
P0615 — Starter is disabled — Starter is disabled
• Fixed in the “D” position (The • Fixed in the “D” position (The
shifting can be performed) shifting can be performed)
• 30 km/h (19MPH) or less • 30 km/h (19MPH) or less
• The shifting between the gears • The shifting between the gears
of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per- of 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 can be per-
formed formed
P0705 — —
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited
• Shift position indicator is • Shift position indicator is
switched OFF switched OFF
• Starter relay is switched OFF • Starter relay is switched OFF
(starter is disabled) (starter is disabled)
• Back-up lamp is OFF • Back-up lamp is OFF
• Large shift shock • Large shift shock
the gears of —
4-5-6-7
the gears of —
4-5-6-7
• Only downshift can be per-
formed
Between
the gears of —
• Treat the vehicle speed that the
1-2-3
vehicle speed signal receives as • The shifting between the gears
P0720 positive of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Fix the gear at driving • Manual mode is prohibited
the gears of • Treat the vehicle speed that the —
4-5-6-7 vehicle speed signal receives as
positive

TCM
Vehicle
condition A
• Locks in 1GR
Neutral • The shifting between the gears
malfunction of 1 - 2 can be performed B
• Locks in 4GR
between • The shifting between the gears
• Manual mode is prohibited —
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
1 - 2 - 3 and • The shifting between the gears
7 of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed C
P0729 • Manual mode is prohibited
P0731
P0732 • Locks in 1GR
P0733 • The shifting between the gears TM
P0734 of 1 - 2 can be performed
tween 1GR and 2GR
tween 2GR and 3GR • The shifting between the gears
Other than • The shifting between the gears E
• Locks in 3GR of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
the above of 2 - 3 - 4 can be performed
• Locks in 4GR • Manual mode is prohibited
• The shifting between the gears F
• Neutral
• Locks in 1GR G
• Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 can be performed
P0730 — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral • The shifting between the gears
of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed H
P0740 — —
• Slip lock-up is prohibited • Slip lock-up is prohibited I
P0744 — —
• Locks in 1GR J
P0795 • Locks in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR, 5GR, of 3 - 4 - 5 can be performed K
P2713 — 6GR or 7GR — • The shifting between the gears
P2722 • Manual mode is prohibited of 4 - 5 - 6 can be performed
P2807 of 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 can be per- L
formed

• The shifting between the gears M
P0780 — — of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Neutral
• Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped- • Downshift when accelerator ped- N
al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited al is depressed is prohibited
P1705 — • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal • Upshift when accelerator pedal
is released is prohibited is released is prohibited is released is prohibited
• Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited • Manual mode is prohibited O
• Locks in 1GR
• Neutral
• Driving with the gear ratio be- • The shifting between the gears P
P1730 — tween 2GR and 3GR of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
• Locks in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR • Manual mode is prohibited

TCM
Vehicle
condition
Paddle
switch mal- Only the paddle switch is prohibited — Only the paddle switch is prohibited
function
Gate switch
P1815 Only the gate switch is prohibited — Only the gate switch is prohibited
malfunction
Malfunction
of both Manual mode is prohibited — Manual mode is prohibited
switches
the gears of of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed — • The shifting between the gears
1-2-3 • Manual mode is prohibited of 1 - 2 - 3 can be performed
U1000 • Line pressure is set to the maxi-
Between mum hydraulic pressure
• Fix the gear at driving
the gears of — • Manual mode is prohibited
4 - 5 -6 - 7
P0720
and — Locks in 5GR — Locks in 5GR
P1721
Protection Control INFOID:0000000004040780
The TCM becomes the protection control status temporarily to protect the safety when the safety of TCM and
transmission is lost. It automatically returns to the normal status if the safety is secured.
The TCM has the following protection control.
REVERSE INHIBIT CONTROL
Intercepts the torque transmission and shift to the neutral status if the selector lever is shifted to “R” position
while the vehicle moves forward at the vehicle speed 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more.
Malfunction detection condition Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more

Control at malfunction Neutral
Normal return condition
• Engine speed: 2,200 rpm or less
• The torque transmission cannot be performed
Vehicle behavior
• There is a shock just before a vehicle stop
1ST ENGINE BRAKE PROTECTION CONTROL

Controls the engine brake so as not to make effective by turning the front brake solenoid output to OFF when
each solenoid becomes the electricity pattern of 1st engine brake during driving at the vehicle speed 25 km/h
or more in any positions other than “R” position or 1GR.
• Select lever and gear: Except for “R” position and 1GR
Malfunction detection condition and
• Vehicle speed: More than 25 km/h (16 MPH)
Control at malfunction Front brake solenoid output signal; OFF
Normal return condition Other than malfunction detection condition
Vehicle behavior Does not exist
TCM HIGH TEMPERATURE PROTECTION CONTROL

Limit the accelerator opening and forcibly control the vehicle to the low torque driving when the electronic sub-
strate in TCM reaches the high temperature.
TCM electronic substrate temperature

• 145°C (293°F) and 120 seconds
Malfunction detection condition
or
• 150°C (302°F)
Control at malfunction Accelerator opening: 0.5/8 or less

TCM
• TCM electronic substrate temperature: Less than 140°C (284°F)
Normal return condition and A
Vehicle behavior Accelerator opening: output torque of approximately 0.5/8
B
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004040781
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart. C
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT TM
• P0615 STATER RELAY
• P0705 T/M RANGE SWITCH A
• P0710 FLUID TEMP SENSOR A E
• P0717 INPUT SPEED SENSOR A
• P0720 OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR
• P0745 PC SOLENOID A F
2
• P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID A
• P0775 PC SOLENOID B
• P0795 PC SOLENOID C
• P2713 PC SOLENOID D G
• P2722 PC SOLENOID E
• P2731 PC SOLENOID F
• P2807 PC SOLENOID G
H
• P0730 INCORRECT GR RATIO
• P0732 2GR INCORRECT RATIO I
3 • P0734 4GR INCORRECT RATIO
J
• P0780 SHIFT
• P1730 INTERLOCK
• P1734 7GR INCORRECT RATIO K
• P0725 ENGINE SPEED
• P1705 TP SENSOR
4
• P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
• P1815 M-MODE SWITCH L
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004040782
M
NOTE:
If DTC “U1000” is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for “U1000 CAN COMM
CIRCUIT”. Refer to TM-270, "Description".
N
*2
DTC
Items
Reference
O
STARTER RELAY — P0615 TM-271
T/M RANGE SWITCH A P0705 P0705 TM-273 P
FLUID TEMP SENSOR A P0710 P0710 TM-274
INPUT SPEED SENSOR A P0717 P0717 TM-276
OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR P0720 P0720 TM-278
ENGINE SPEED — P0725 TM-280

TCM
DTC*2
Items
Reference
INCORRECT GR RATIO P0730 P0730 TM-284
PC SOLENOID A P0745 P0745 TM-298
SHIFT SOLENOID A P0750 P0750 TM-299
PC SOLENOID B P0775 P0775 TM-300
SHIFT P0780 P0780 TM-301
PC SOLENOID C P0795 P0795 TM-302
TP SENSOR — P1705 TM-303
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL — P1721 TM-305
INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 TM-307
M-MODE SWITCH — P1815 TM-311
PC SOLENOID D P2713 P2713 TM-317
PC SOLENOID E P2722 P2722 TM-318
PC SOLENOID F P2731 P2731 TM-319
PC SOLENOID G P2807 P2807 TM-320
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 TM-270
*1: Refer to TM-263, "Diagnosis Description".
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
IGN COUNTER
IGN counter indicates the number of items that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected.
• CAN malfunction
switch OFF → ON.
• Except for CAN malfunction
switch OFF → ON.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004040783
B
The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1.
CAUTION:
If any malfunction occurs in the RE7R01A transmission, replace the A/T assembly. C
Diagnostic item
TM

E
Torque converter solenoid valve



F
Output speed sensor

Vehicle speed signal
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Control linkage
G
H
TM-370
TM-278
TM-305
TM-303
TM-280
TM-276
TM-274
TM-273
TM-298
TM-295
TM-318
TM-302
TM-317
TM-300
TM-320
TM-319
TM-299
TM-270
I
Shift point is high in “D” position. 1 2 3
Shift point is low in “D” position. 1 2
→ “D” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 2 5 J
→ “R” position 3 6 5 5 4 2 1 5
1GR ⇔ 2GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
K
2GR ⇔ 3GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 4
3GR ⇔ 4GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
Driving When 4GR ⇔ 5GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4 L
perfor- Large shift-
mance 5GR ⇔ 6GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
shock ing
Poor gears 6GR ⇔ 7GR 3 1 5 3 3 2 2 4
perfor- M
mance Downshift when accel-
erator pedal is de- 2 1 4 2 2 3
pressed
Upshift when acceler- N
2 1 4 2 2 3
ator pedal is released
Lock-up 3 1 3 3 3 2 4
O
Judder Lock-up 2 1 1 4 3
In “R” position 2 1
In “N” position 2 1 P
Strange noise
In “D” position 2 1
Engine at idle 2 1

ble
Func-
tion trou-
Gear
change
does no

tion
tion
“D” posi-
“M” posi-
Symptom
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 7GR
5GR → 6GR
4GR → 5GR
2GR → 3GR
1GR → 2GR
3GR → 4GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
Locks in 5GR
Locks in 1GR
Does not lock-up
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
TM-356
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
TM-322 Battery voltage
3
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
1
TM-273 transmission range switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
TM-332 Stop lamp switch
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
TM-295 Torque converter solenoid valve
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1

Diagnostic item
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1

1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1

1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1

1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1

1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1

1
[7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
2009 FX35/FX50
ble
Func-
tion trou-
Poor
shifting

not
En-
gine
work
does
Slip
brake
Symptom
ing gears
When shift-
“M” position
“D” position → “M” position
2GR → 1GR
3GR → 2GR
4GR → 3GR
5GR → 4GR
6GR → 5GR
7GR → 6GR
6GR ⇔ 7GR
5GR ⇔ 6GR
4GR ⇔ 5GR
3GR ⇔ 4GR
2GR ⇔ 3GR
1GR ⇔ 2GR
TM-370 Control linkage
TM-357
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
TM-273 Transmission range switch
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1

TM-295 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
2
1

Diagnostic item
2
1

2
1

2
1

2
2
1
1

2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1

2
1

3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2

[7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
2009 FX35/FX50
I
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
C
O
G
M
TM
SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item



Output speed sensor
Manual mode switch
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Input speed sensor
Symptom
Control linkage
TM-370
TM-278
TM-280
TM-276
TM-274
TM-273
TM-298
TM-295
TM-318
TM-302
TM-317
TM-300
TM-320
TM-319
TM-299
TM-270
TM-311
“D” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
“R” position, accelera- 5 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
While starting off by
Poor
accelerating in 1st, 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 2
power
engine races.
trans- Slip
mis- While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
sion 2GR, engine races.
Func- 3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
3GR, engine races.
tion trou-
ble While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 2
4GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
5GR, engine races.
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
6GR, engine races.
Poor While accelerating in
3 3 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 2
power 7GR, engine races.
trans- Slip
Lock-up 3 3 3 4 1 1 2
mis-
sion No creep at all. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extremely large
1
creep.

SYSTEM SYMPTOM
Diagnostic item A

B



C
Output speed sensor
Engine speed signal

Symptom
Stop lamp switch

Control linkage
Battery voltage
TM
Starter relay
E
TM-370
TM-278
TM-303
TM-280
TM-322
TM-273
TM-332
TM-298
TM-295
TM-318
TM-302
TM-317
TM-300
TM-320
TM-319
TM-299
TM-271
F
Vehicle cannot run in all position. 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Driving is not possible in “D” posi- G
3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
tion.
Driving is not possible in “R” posi-
3 2 1 1 1
tion.
H
Power transmis-
Engine stall 3 4 4 5 2 1
sion cannot be
performed Engine stalls when selector lever
3 4 4 2 1
shifted “N” → “D” or “R”. I
Engine does not start in “N” or “P”
3 1 2 1
position.
Function
Engine starts in position other than J
trouble 3 2 1
“N” or “P”.
Vehicle does not enter parking con-
1 2
dition.
K
Parking condition is not cancelled. 1 2
Poor operation Vehicle moves forward with the “R” L
1 2
position.
Vehicle moves backward with the M
1 2
“D” position.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004040784
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s)
with a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly
causing serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000004040785
• Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable

from the negative terminal before connecting or disconnect-
ing the A/T assembly harness connector. Because battery
voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
• Perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE” after performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.
If the repair is completed DTC should not be displayed in the
“DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
• Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids
and Lubricants".
• Use lint-free paper not cloth rags during work.
• Dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordi-
nance, etc. after replacing the ATF.
• Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside
of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from
SEF217U
becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
• Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
• Use lint-free paper or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere A
with the operation of the transmission.
• Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
• All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
B
reassembly.
• Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the A/T is disassembled.
• It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
• The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. C
Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs
and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
• Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. TM
• Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and
seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Never use grease.
• Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
• Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to TM- E
361, "Service Notice or Precaution".
• When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the ATF is drained. Old ATF will remain in torque con-
verter and ATF cooling system. F
Always follow the procedures under “Changing” when changing ATF. Refer to TM-363, "Changing".
• Occasionally, the parking gear may be locked with the torque insufficiently released, when stopping the vehi-
cle by shifting the selector lever from “D” or “R” to “P” position with the brake pedal depressed.
In this case, the shock with a thud caused by the abrupt release of torque may occur when shifting the selec- G
tor lever from “P” position to other positions.
However, this symptom is not a malfunction resulting the damage of parts.
H
Service Notice or Precaution INFOID:0000000004040786
ATF COOLER SERVICE

If ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, I
inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines using
cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to TM-179,
"Cleaning". For radiator replacement, refer to CO-39, "Exploded View". J

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000004040787
Tool number
Description
Tool name
A/T fluid changing and adjustment
B2318N3301*
Vacuum hose
Inside dia.: 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
Outside dia.: 7.5 mm (0.30 in)
Length: 5.0 m (16.4 ft)
JSDIA0862ZZ
Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

A/T FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
A/T FLUID
Changing INFOID:0000000005151189
B
1. 1st Step
a. Cut the vacuum hose (B2318N3301) (A) by 20 mm (0.79 in) to fit C
ure.
TM
JSDIA0861GB F
2. 2nd Step
G
d. When the ATF starts to drop, temporarily tighten the drain plug to the oil pan. H
NOTE:
Never replace drain plug and drain plug gasket with new ones yet.
e. Remove overflow plug from oil pan. I
g. Temporarily tighten the overflow plug to the oil pan. J
CAUTION:
h. Lift down the vehicle. K
i. Start the engine and wait for approximately 3 minutes.
j. Stop the engine.
3. 3rd Step L
a. Repeat the “2nd Step”.
4. Final Step
a. Use CONSULT-III to check that the ATF temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less. M
N
CAUTION:
• Tighten the drain plug into the oil pan to the specified torque.
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. O
8 lmp qt) of the ATF. P
CAUTION:
i. Start the engine.
j. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).

A/T FLUID
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP
1” of Data Monitor using CONSULT-III.
k. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
l. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position.
m. Lift up the vehicle when the ATF temperature reaches 40°C (104°F), and then remove the overflow plug
from the oil pan.
n. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug into the oil pan to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
ATF : Refer to TM-387, "General Specification".

Fluid capacity : Refer to TM-387, "General Specification".
CAUTION:
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and A/
T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited
warranty.
• When filling ATF, be careful not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust.
Drain plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-376, "Exploded

View".
Overflow plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-376, "Exploded
View".
Adjustment INFOID:0000000005151190
CAUTION:
Always maintain the ATF temperature within between 35°C (95°F) and 45°C (113°F) while checking with
CONSULT-III when the ATF level adjustment is performed.
1. Cut the vacuum hose (B2318N3301) (A) by 20 mm (0.79 in) to fit
ure.
3. Make the ATF temperature approximately 40°C (104°F).
NOTE:
The ATF level is greatly affected by the temperature. Always
check the ATF temperature on “ATF TEMP 1” of Data Monitor
using CONSULT-III.
4. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
JSDIA0861GB
5. Shift the selector lever through each gear position. Leave selec-
tor lever in “P” position.
6. Lift up the vehicle.
7. Check the ATF leakage from transmission.
8. Remove overflow plug from oil pan.
9. Insert the own made tube into the overflow plug hole, and then fill approximately 0.5 liters (4/8 US qt, 4/8
lmp qt) of the ATF.
10. Check that the ATF leaks when removing the own made tube from the overflow plug hole. If the ATF does
not leak, refill the ATF.
11. When the ATF starts to drop, tighten the overflow plug into the oil pan to the specified torque.
CAUTION:

A/T FLUID
Overflow plug - tightening torque : Refer to TM-376, "Exploded A

View".
TM

A/T FLUID COOLER
A/T FLUID COOLER
Cleaning INFOID:0000000004040789
Whenever an A/T is replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned.
Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can con-
taminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of ATF. In either case, mal-
function of the newly serviced A/T may result.
Debris, if present, may build up as ATF enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler
through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
CLEANING PROCEDURE
2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the A/T fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses
from the steel cooler tubes or by-pass valve.
NOTE:
Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose
remains on the tube fitting.
4. Allow any ATF that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the
oil pan.
JPDIA0711GB

let hose.
CAUTION:
ventilation.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet
hose.
through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any
remaining ATF.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times.
11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the A/T
fluid cooler steel lines to the A/T.
12. Remove the banjo bolts. JPDIA0713GB
13. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T
by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds.
14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) through each steel line from the cooler
side back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to force out any remaining ATF.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines.
16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings.
17. Perform “DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE”.

A/T FLUID COOLER
DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: A
Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification.
2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. B
let hose. C
CAUTION:
TM
ventilation.
• Never breath vapors or spray mist. E
hose until ATF flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. F
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the
cooler inlet hose.
G
I
JPDIA0714GB
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. J
7. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet
hose.
8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 to 9 kg/cm2 (71 to 128 psi) K
through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining ATF into
the coffee filter.
9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. L
10. Perform “INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
JPDIA0715GB M
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
N
a. If small metal debris less than 1 mm (0.040 in) in size or metal
powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal
debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and
the procedure is ended. O
SCIA2967E

A/T FLUID COOLER
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1 mm
(0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in
the coffee filter, the A/T fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T
fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection proce-
dure is ended. Refer to CO-39, "Exploded View".
SCIA7031E
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.

STALL TEST
STALL TEST
A
Inspection and Judgment INFOID:0000000004040791
INSPECTION B
1. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary.
2. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. C
3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn.
4. Start the engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position.
TM
5. Gradually press down the accelerator pedal while holding down the foot brake.
6. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly release the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION:
Never hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. E
Stall speed : Refer to TM-388, "Stall Speed".

F
8. Cool down the ATF.
CAUTION: G
Run the engine at idle for at least 1 minute.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 with selector lever in “R” position.
JUDGMENT OF STALL TEST H
Selector lever position

Possible location of malfunction
“D” and “M” “R” I
• Low brake
H O • 1st one-way clutch
• 2nd one-way clutch J
• Reverse brake
Stall speed O H • 1st one-way clutch
K
L L • Engine and torque converter one-way clutch
H H • Line pressure low
O: Stall speed within standard value position L
H: Stall speed higher than standard value
L: Stall speed lower than standard value
Stall test standard value position
M
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3GR, 4GR or 5GR Direct clutch slippage
N
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4GR, 5GR, 6GR or 7GR High and low reverse clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5GR, 6GR or 7GR Input clutch slippage
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 5 → 6 Slipping in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR or 6GR 2346 brake slippage O
Does not shift-up “D” or “M” position 6 → 7 Slipping in 7GR Front brake slippage

A/T POSITION
A/T POSITION
INSPECTION
1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop).
2. Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also
check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Shift the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle.
4. Confirm that the selector lever stops at each position by feeling the engagement when it is moved through
all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever matches the position shown
by the shift position indicator and the A/T body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions cor-
rectly is shown in the figure.
6. When selector button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position with-
out applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check but-
ton operation for sticking.
7. Confirm that the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is
placed in the “R” position. Confirm that the back-up lamps do not
illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in
the “P” or “N” position.
8. Confirm that the engine can only be started with the selector
lever in the “P” and “N” positions. (With selector lever in the “P” JSDIA0790GB
position, engine can be started even when selector lever is

moved forward and backward.)
9. Make sure that A/T is locked completely in “P” position.
10. DS mode must be indicated on the combination meter when the selector lever is shifted to the manual
shift gate. When the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in the DS mode, manual mode should be
indicated on the combination meter.
In addition, a set shift position must be changed when the selector lever is shifted to the “+” or “−” side in
the manual mode. (Only while driving.)
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen nut ( ).
2. Place manual lever and selector lever in “P” position.
3. While pressing lower lever (A) toward rear of vehicle (in “P” posi-
tion direction), tighten nut to specified torque. Refer to TM-374,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the control rod while pressing lower
lever of A/T shift selector assembly.
NOTE:
Press lower lever of A/T shift selector assembly with a force of
approximately 1 kg (9.8 N). JPDIA0884ZZ

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
B
TM
JSDIA1353GB

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
1. Selector lever knob 2. Lock pin 3. Indicator plate

4. Selector lever position indicator 5. Harness connector 6. Insert finisher
7. Control rod 8. Dust cover 9. Bracket
10. Dust cover plate 11. Snap pin 12. Washer
13. Collar 14. Clip 15. Pivot pin
16. Insulator 17. Shift lock unit 18. A/T shift selector assembly
19. Adapter
REMOVAL
2. Remove control rod from A/T shift selector.
4. Remove knob cover (A) below selector lever downward.
5. Pull lock pin (1) out of selector lever knob (2).
6. Remove selector lever knob.
7. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Exploded
View".
CAUTION:
When disconnecting selector lever position indicator con-
nector from shift position switch, never twist or apply an
excessive load to the connector.
8. Remove the rear ventilator duct 1. Refer to VTL-11, "Exploded JPDIA0898ZZ
View".
10. Remove harness clips from A/T shift selector assembly.
12. Remove A/T shift selector assembly mounting bolts.
13. Slightly lift the A/T shift selector assembly (1) and slide it right-
ward. Then pull it out in the diagonally right direction.
14. Remove adapter from A/T shift selector assembly.
15. Remove dust cover and dust cover plate from A/T shift selector
assembly.
16. Remove dust cover from dust cover plate.
17. Remove shift lock unit from A/T shift selector assembly.
18. Remove brackets from vehicle floor panel.
19. Remove selector lever position indicator from console finisher
assembly: JPDIA0055ZZ
a. Remove indicator assembly from console finisher assembly.

Refer to IP-22, "Exploded View".
b. Remove insert finisher from indicator assembly.
c. Remove selector lever position indicator.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing a collar) of the pivot pin.
• Refer to the followings when installing selector lever knob to A/T shift selector assembly.
1. Insert lock pin to selector lever knob.
2. Install selector lever knob over selector lever until a click is felt.

A/T SHIFT SELECTOR
CAUTION:
• Install it straight, and never tap or apply any shock to install it. A
• Never push selector button.
B
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION C

TM

CONTROL ROD
CONTROL ROD
JSDIA1002GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Manual lever 3. Lock washer

4. Control rod 5. Washer 6. Insulator
7. Collar 8. Conical washer 9. Snap pin
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect A/T shift selector and control rod. Refer to TM-371, "Exploded View".
3. Remove manual lever from A/T assembly.
4. Remove control rod from manual lever.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Apply multi-purpose grease on the pin surface (that slides after installing collar) of the tip of the con-
trol rod.


PADDLE SHIFTER
PADDLE SHIFTER
A
TM
I
JPDIA0051GB
1. Steering column assembly 2. Paddle shifter (shift-down) 3. Paddle shifter (shift-up) J


K
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View". L
2. Disconnect paddle shifter connectors from each paddle shifter.
3. Remove paddle shifter mounting bolts and nuts.
4. Remove each paddle shifter from steering column assembly. M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
N

OIL PAN
OIL PAN
JPDIA0883GB
1. A/T 2. Oil pan gasket 3. Oil pan

4. Clip 5. Oil pan mounting bolt 6. Overflow plug
7. Drain plug 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Magnet
REMOVAL
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 connectors (A).
: Vehicle front

4. Remove bracket (2) from A/T assembly.
JPDIA0902ZZ

OIL PAN
5. Remove clips (1).
A
: Vehicle front
B
6. Remove oil pan (2) and oil pan gasket.
7. Remove magnets from oil pan.
C
JSDIA0793ZZ
TM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drain plug and drain plug gasket. E
• Clean foreign materials (gear wear particles) that adhere on the inside of the oil pan and on the mag-
net, and then assemble.
• Refer to the followings when installing oil pan (2) (with oil pan gas- F
ket) and clips (1) to transmission case.
: Vehicle front
G
CAUTION:
• Never reuse oil pan gasket and oil pan mounting bolts. H
• Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc.
from oil pan gasket mounting surface of transmission case
and oil pan. JSDIA0793ZZ I
• Install oil pan gasket in the direction to align hole position.
- Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical
order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them.
J
: Vehicle front
• Pour ATF into A/T assembly after completing installation. Refer to

TM-363, "Changing". K
JSDIA0794ZZ
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000004040825 M
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of mal- N
function. If the ATF is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign
particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replace-
ment. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up.
Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can O
inhibit pump pressure.
• If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler
cleaning. Refer to TM-366, "Cleaning". P
SCIA5199E

Check A/T fluid leakage.

OIL PAN

AIR BREATHER HOSE
AIR BREATHER HOSE
A
TM
G
JPDIA0866GB
1. Air breather vent 2. Spring washer 3. A/T assembly

4. Clip 5. Air breather hose 6. Air breather tube
H
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000004040827 I
REMOVAL
1. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-109, "VK50VE : Exploded View". J
2. Remove exhaust mounting bracket and three way catalyst (right bank). Refer to EX-10, "Exploded View".
K
6. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. L

AIR BREATHER HOSE
7. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine
and front suspension member (2).
W : 150 mm (5.91 in)

D : 30 mm (1.18 in)
H : 20 mm (0.79 in)
CAUTION:
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of
engine and front suspension member when removing air
breather vent. (Because VVEL control shaft position sen-
sor may be damaged by the interference between VVEL
control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the opera-
tion is performed without the wooden block inserted.)
• After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out
easily.
8. Remove rear engine mounting member with a power tool. Refer
to EM-196, "Exploded View".
9. Remove bolt fixing A/T assembly to engine assembly with power
tool.
10. Remove air breather vent.
JPDIA0923ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When installing air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the
hose.
• When inserting air breather hose to the air breather vent (for
A/T) (1), be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the spool
(A) portion.
2 : Air breather vent (for transfer)

• Install air breather hose to air breather vent (for A/T) so that
the paint mark is facing upward.
• Ensure clips are securely installed to brackets when installing
air breather hose to brackets.
JPDIA0867ZZ

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
A
TM
I
JPDIA0855GB
1. A/T assembly 2. Copper washer 3. A/T fluid cooler tube J

7. Hose clamp 8. A/T fluid cooler hose B 9. A/T fluid cooler hose A
A. To radiator K

L
REMOVAL
1. Shift the selector lever to “N” position, and release the parking brake. M
3. Remove engine under cover with a power tool. Refer to EXT-31, "Exploded View".
4. Remove A/T fluid cooler hose A and A/T fluid cooler hose B. N
5. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connectors (A).
: Vehicle front O

7. Remove harness bracket (2) from A/T assembly. Refer to TM- P
384, "Exploded View".
8. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-109, "VK50VE :
Exploded View".
9. Remove front drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-26,
"Exploded View". JPDIA0902ZZ
10. Remove A/T fluid cooler tubes from A/T assembly and engine assembly.

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
12. Remove clips and bracket.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend A/T fluid cooler tubes.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Hose name Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*

*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
D : Vehicle front
E : Vehicle upper
should be positioned as shown in the figure.
JSDIA0795ZZ
- Insert A/T fluid cooler hoses according to dimension (L) described below.

Radiator assembly side A End reaches the radius creve end.
(D).]
(D).]
JSDIA0882ZZ

FLUID COOLER SYSTEM
with dimension (A) from the hose edge. A
Dimension A : 5 – 9 mm (0.20 – 0.35 in)

- Hose clamp should not interfere with the bulge of fluid cooler tube. B
SCIA8123E
TM
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION E

Adjust A/T fluid level. Refer to TM-364, "Adjustment". F

< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

JPDIA0848GB
1. Air breather vent 2. A/T assembly 3. Harness bracket

4. Harness bracket 5. Harness bracket 6. Spring washer
A. For tightening torque, Refer to TM-384, "Removal and Installation".
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
from the A/T assembly.
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of engine and front suspension member when
removing A/T assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft position sensor may be dam-
aged by the interference between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash panel if the operation
is performed without the wooden block inserted.)
2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
5. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to DLN-109, "VK50VE : Exploded View".
CAUTION:

• Never place in an area affected by magnetism. A
8. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter.
CAUTION: B
9. Remove A/T fluid cooler tube from the A/T assembly and engine assembly. Refer to TM-381, "Exploded
View". C
CAUTION: TM
When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug.
12. Insert a wooden block (A) between oil pan (upper) (1) of engine
and front suspension member (2). E
W : 150 mm (5.91 in
D : 30 mm (1.18 in)
F
H : 20 mm (0.79 in)
: Vehicle front
CAUTION: G
• Always insert a wooden block between oil pan (upper) of
engine and front suspension member when removing A/T
assembly from the engine. (Because VVEL control shaft H
position sensor may be damaged by the interference
between VVEL control shaft position sensor and dash
panel if the operation is performed without the wooden
block inserted.) I
• After inserting wooden block, check it does not fall out
easily.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member with power tool. Refer to J
14. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and AWD solenoid connec-
tor. K
JPDIA0923ZZ
15. Remove harness and harness brackets.
17. Remove air breather hose and air breather vent. Refer to TM-379, "Exploded View". L
18. Remove A/T assembly with transfer assembly from vehicle.

CAUTION: M
• Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack.
19. Remove transfer assembly from A/T assembly with power tool. N
Refer to DLN-65, "VK50VE : Exploded View".
SCIA2203E
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

engine assembly.
JPDIA0899ZZ

check dimension (A) to ensure it is within the reference value limit.
B : Scale
C : Straightedge
Dimension (A) : Refer to TM-388, "Torque Convert-

er".
JPDIA0042ZZ

Bolt symbol A B* C
Insertion direction A/T assembly to engine assembly
Number of bolts 5 1 4
Bolt length (L)
70 (2.76) 65 (2.56)
mm (in)
Tightening torque
113 (12, 83) 74 (7.5, 55) JPDIA0852ZZ
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
*: Tightening the bolt with air breather vent and spring washer.
• Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily
CAUTION:
• When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine.

Check the following items.

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

General Specification INFOID:0000000004040840
B
Transmission model code number 1XR0A, 1XR2A, 1XR2B, 1XR4D

C
Stall torque ratio 1.93 : 1
1st 4.887
2nd 3.170 TM
3rd 2.027
4th 1.412
Transmission gear ratio E
5th 1.000
6th 0.864
7th 0.775 F
Reverse 4.041
Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*1
G
Fluid capacity 11.3 liter (12 US qt, 10 Imp qt)*2
CAUTION:
H
• Using ATF other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration driveability and A/T durability, and may damage
the A/T, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
• *1: Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• *2: The fluid capacity is the reference value. I
Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs INFOID:0000000004040841
J
Unit: km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Gear position
Full throttle Half throttle K
D1 → D2 50 – 54 (32 – 33) 19 – 23 (12 – 14)
D2 → D3 79 – 87 (50 – 54) 41 – 49 (26 – 30)
D3 → D4 126 – 136 (79 – 84) 68 – 78 (43 – 48) L
D4 → D5 181 – 191 (113 – 118) 99 – 109 (62 – 67)
D5 → D6 235 – 245 (147 – 152) 155 – 165 (97 – 102)
M
D6 → D7 250 – 260 (156 – 161) 206 – 216 (129 – 134)
D7 → D6 240 – 250 (150 – 155) 162 – 172 (101 – 106)
D6 → D5 219 – 229 (137 – 142) 105 – 115 (66 – 71) N
D5 → D4 165 – 175 (103 – 108) 53 – 63 (33 – 39)
D4 → D3 110 – 120 (69 – 74) 31 – 41 (20 – 25)
O
D3 → D2 40 – 48 (25 – 29) 16 – 24 (10 – 14)
D2 → D1 16 – 20 (10 – 12) 7 – 11 (5 – 6)
• At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. P

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [7AT: RE7R01B (VK50VE)]
Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases INFOID:0000000004040842

Throttle position
Closed throttle 47 – 55 (30 – 34) 44 – 52 (28 – 32)
Half throttle 60 – 68 (38 – 42) 57 – 65 (36 – 40)
Stall Speed INFOID:0000000004040843
Stall speed 2,467 – 2,767 rpm
Input Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000004040845

When running at 34 km/h (21 MPH) in 3rd speed witch the closed throttle position
signal OFF.
When running at 52 km/h (32 MPH) in 5th speed witch the closed throttle position
signal OFF.
Output Speed Sensor INFOID:0000000004040846

Output speed sensor When running at 20 km/h (12 MPH). 185 Hz
Torque Converter INFOID:0000000004040847
Dimension between end of converter housing and torque converter 24.0 mm (0.94 in)

TM Re7r01a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM Re7r01a

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM Re7r01a

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE

TRANSAXLE & TRANSMISSION

SHIFT PATTERN ....................................................... 29 P0615 STARTER RELAY ................................. 82

Revision: 2009 March TM-1 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-2 2009 FX35/FX50

PRECAUTION ............................................ 173 2WD .......................................................................... 194

Revision: 2009 March TM-3 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-4 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-5 2009 FX35/FX50

SELECTOR LEVER POSITION INDICATOR . 333 PADDLE SHIFTER ........................................... 375

Revision: 2009 March TM-6 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-7 2009 FX35/FX50

1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM

Revision: 2009 March TM-8 2009 FX35/FX50

6.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “DIAGNOSIS CHART BY SYMPTOM” A

Revision: 2009 March TM-9 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-10 2009 FX35/FX50

Without Paddle Shifter

Revision: 2009 March TM-11 2009 FX35/FX50

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Switch, Sensor or Signal TCM function Actuator

Revision: 2009 March TM-12 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-13 2009 FX35/FX50

With Paddle Shifter

Revision: 2009 March TM-14 2009 FX35/FX50

Component Description INFOID:0000000003838837

Transmission range switch TM-84, "Description"

Revision: 2009 March TM-15 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-16 2009 FX35/FX50

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator

Revision: 2009 March TM-17 2009 FX35/FX50

Back-up Control (Engine Brake)

During Shift Change

At Low Fluid Temperature

Revision: 2009 March TM-18 2009 FX35/FX50

Without Paddle Shifter

Revision: 2009 March TM-19 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-20 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-21 2009 FX35/FX50

Component Description INFOID:0000000003940588

Revision: 2009 March TM-22 2009 FX35/FX50

System Description INFOID:0000000003940604

Sensor Input signal to TCM TCM function Actuator

Revision: 2009 March TM-23 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-24 2009 FX35/FX50

Downshifting by the manual mode

Revision: 2009 March TM-25 2009 FX35/FX50

Without Paddle Shifter

Revision: 2009 March TM-26 2009 FX35/FX50

With Paddle Shifter

Revision: 2009 March TM-27 2009 FX35/FX50

Component Description INFOID:0000000003940678

Revision: 2009 March TM-28 2009 FX35/FX50

SHIFT PATTERN : System Description INFOID:0000000003941716 J

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Revision: 2009 March TM-29 2009 FX35/FX50

Revision: 2009 March TM-30 2009 FX35/FX50

Paddle shifter shift down signal1, 2